Home

User`s Manual IB(NA)-66789-J

1. 100 110VAC 100 110VAC oa 200 240VAC A1S61PN CPU D 200 240VAC A1S62PN CPU ac 3 ac alle 7 a X O Ba Oll O 24V TO i JOll O 24G O ryoo 4 Q O mi 5 ba Ilole FS 11 DG are 11 DC ol O igs HOI Lasse eG Q 42 ao Sees i i gol 1 NES 1 100 240VAC Ls HOI O 100 240VAC Y X j Y y i Connect to the 24VDC terminals of an I O dule that requi Extension base unit A1S58B Oe en ia Connect to the 24VDC terminals of an I O module that requires 24VDC internally Extension base unit A1S68B VO 1 0 A1S62PN VO Extension cable Extension cable O 24V O 24G iKe IO Ol Oro Ol O See TOJ O7INPUT booo jal O 100 240VAC B 100 240VAC Grounding wire Grounding wire gt Ground Ground 1 Use the thickest possible max 2 mm 14 AWG wires for the 100 200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connection terminals For wiring a terminal block be sure to use a solderless terminal To prevent short circuit due to loosening screws use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0 8 mm 0 03 inch or less thick The number of the solderless terminals to be con
2. 9 1 6 Noise filter power Supply line filter oo cece e ee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeaeees 9 10 9 1 7 Power line for external power supply terminal cccccceeceeeeeeeeeececaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 9 11 9 1 8 Installation environment of the CC Link LT module and the AS i module 00005 9 11 9 2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives ccceeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeseaeees 9 12 9 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC AnS series programmable controller 2 0 000 9 12 9 2 2 Precautions when using the MELSEC AnS series programmable controller 0008 9 12 SAS om Le ETEN 9 ree tr EE eRe Ca a E E 9 13 9 24 Control paneks a eae a ta a tage taeid sy Paarl Gt ahaa A ee 9 14 9 2 5 Mod le installation meena aa eth sadgcdeeen ea eea faa u tu aa a rae araara aeai 9 15 9 2 6 GFOUNGING iesean aiiai e E A AA EANNA AAAA KAN AREA AA AAEE AANE SEE NEA AEA TETA 9 15 Sar Extemal WING aerae EA E E AA AEE eh 9 15 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 1to10 8 10 1 Daily Inspection ssdri iii ia te deen nade edad lee AE lay deel aN De DAAA aE 10 2 10 2 PerlodiGINSPeCtiOn e203 5 sess iertente aceasta a ies on etna ee and a linen a ad 10 3 Ta Baten REplACeMONt crar tTa ar TA cd tev dana A deeds aad toe tenes tal de iaettelices 10 4 1031 Battery life viancicae A i Cee ee een ei ee 10 4 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure ccc
3. 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnNUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Massage PARAMETER ERROR Checked at power on and at STOP PAUSE RUN Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Error and Cause Capacity settings of the main and sub programs microcomputer program file register comments status latch sampl ing trace and extension file registers are not within the usable range of the CPU Total of the set capacity of the main and sub programs file register comments status latch sampling trace and extension file registers exceeds capacity of the memory cassette Corrective Action Read parameters in the CPU memory check the contents make necessary corrections and write them again to the memory Latch range set by parameters or setting of M L or S is incorrect Sum check error Either of settings of the remote RUN PAUSE contact point by parameters operation mode at occurrence of error annunciator indication mode or STOP RUN indication mode is incorrect The MNET MINI automatic refresh setting by parameters is incorrect Timer setting by parameters is incorrect Counter setting by parameters is incorrect Read parameters in the CPU memory check the contents make necessary corrections and write them again to the me
4. cceeeee App 58 Installation and Removal 000cee 8 11 Performance Specifications 0000 4 1 D Dairy INSPeCtiON cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeetereeeeeees 10 2 Data register D ccceeeeeseeeteeeeeeeee 4 2 4 5 Device Accumulator A eeaeee 4 2 4 5 Annunciator F aeaaaee eeaeee 4 2 4 5 Counter C aaa aaan 4 2 4 5 Data register D cccceeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 2 4 5 File register R cccceceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 MELSEC A Index register V Z cscccceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 Internal relay M 4 2 4 5 Interrupt pointer I ccceceeeeeeeeeeee 4 2 4 5 Latch relay L eeeseeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 Link register W nnna nennen 4 2 4 5 Link relay B eninin 4 2 4 5 Pointer P eieaa ada 4 2 4 5 Special register D 0 ceeee 4 2 4 5 Special relay M s eeceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 Step relay S ccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 TMr F tis devscvecleeds wetencd enon 4 2 4 5 Device List c cccceecceceeeeeeeeeeesseccaeeeeeeetes 4 17 Device POINTS iiias 4 2 4 5 E END processing c ccccccceeeseecceceeseeeeeeeeentenees 4 7 Error Code Listrinenn 11 11 External Dimensions CPU module ccccceceeeeecceceeeeeeeees App 58 Extension Base Unit c ceeeeees App 62 Main Base Unit ecceeeeeeeeeeeee
5. 2 ecceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeestaeeeeeeeeees App 67 Appendix 6 Transportation Precautions ccccceccceeeeeeeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeesecceneaesaeeeeeeeeeeteetecsnenanaeeees App 68 Appendix 6 1 Relevant models cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaaaeaeeceeeeeeeeseseecsiciesaeeeeeees App 68 Appendix 6 2 Transportation Guidelines ceccccceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeaecceeeeeeeesesenesseeeeeeeneess App 69 Appendix 7 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States App 70 Appendix 7 1 Disposal preCautions ccccccccceeeeeeeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeaeeceeeeeeeeseseeesicueeaeeeeeees App 70 Appendix 7 2 Exportation precautions ccccceeceseceeceeceeeeeeeeeeececeaacaeceeeeeeeeeseseecsenieeaeeeeees App 71 About This Manuals The following manuals are related to this product Related Manuals Manual Name ACPU QCPU A A mode Programming Manual Fundamentals Describes programming methods necessary for creating programs device names parame ters program types memory area configuration and so on Sold separately ACPU QCPU A A mode Programming Manual Common Instructions Describes how to use the sequence instruction basic instructions applied instructions and microcomputer programs Sold separately AnSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A mode Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions Describes instructions that have been ex
6. CTL Output module ombined module Sink output 3 lt lt Back electromotive force Load TB2 OFF 1 Shut off 4 COM CTL 11 28 Countermeasure To prevent the generation of the back electromotive force connect diode in parallel with load where the back electromotive force has been generated Source output 3 Back electromotive force a Load Sink output 3 Back electromotive a force z APPENDICES mms Si APPENDICES Appendix1 Instruction List The instruction list to be used with a programmable controller is shown Refer to the following Programming Manuals for the details of the instructions e ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Fundamentals IB 66249 e ACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions IB 66250 e ANSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions IB 66251 e ANACPU AnUCPU Programming Manual AD57 Instructions IB 66257 e AnNACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual PID Control Instructions IB 66258 1 Sequence instructions a Contact instruction Contact LD LDI AND ANI OR ORI b Association command Association ANB ORB MPS MRD MPP c Output instruction Output OUT SET RST PLS PLF d Shift instruction Shift SFT SFTP e Master control instruct
7. eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees App 54 List of parameter setting range 4 19 Parameter Setting Ranges 0 08 4 19 Part Names Parts NAMES cccecccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 5 4 6 7 Parts names and setting 0 eeeeeeeee 4 45 PAUSE status 0 0 ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 10 Periodic inspection ceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 10 3 Peripheral Device 2 s eseeeeeeeeees App 46 POInter P saii maiae 4 2 4 5 Power Consumption ccccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 3 4 6 Power supply module External Dimensions cccceee App 59 Parts NAMES ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeteteeeteees 5 4 Power supply module selection 5 5 3 Procedure to read an error code 0 0 11 11 Processing of the index register App 57 Index 2 mms ELS EC A Processing speed cccceceeeeeeeseeteeteeees 4 1 4 4 Program Capacity c cccceceeeeeeteeeeeeeenee 4 1 4 4 Programming language s e 4 1 4 4 R Relevant Models ccccccecseeseeseeeeeees App 68 Remote RUN PAUSE contacts 0 4 3 4 6 Retentive timer cccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 RUN Status nueiname iaia 4 10 STOP status 0 ccceceeeceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 S Self diagnostics FUNCTIONS eeeeeeeeeeeee 4 13 Setting ranges of timer and counter
8. System design circuit example AC DC system Power supply 0000 Fuse i CPU module _ M9006 DC power n I supply Transformer M9084 MELSEC A XM 1 Fuse TM The setting for TM is the time taken to establish the DC input signal Voltage relay recommended Output for warning lamp or buzzer Turned ON in RUN status by M9039 0 The procedures used to switch on the power supply are indicated below AC system AC DC system Switches the power supply to output devices OFF when the system stops At emergency stops at stops on reaching a limit 1 2 3 4 Switch the power supply ON Set the CPU module to RUN Switch the start switch ON The output equipments are driven in accordance with the program when the magnetic contactor MC comes ON 1 2 3 4 Switch the power supply ON Set the CPU module to RUN Switch RA2 ON when the DC power supply starts Set the timer TM to ON upon 100 establishment of DC power supply Set value for TM shall be the period from RA2 turned ON to 100 establishment of DC power supply Make this set value 0 5 seconds Switch the start switch ON The output equipments are driven in accordance with the program when the magnetic contactor MC comes ON When a voltage relay is used for RA2 the timer in the program TM
9. ececceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeeeetaeeeeeees 8 9 B42 MSTA ANON wits tec cectteelotteiie r a a A gre ues cama cds atin tad a doa uh ag eneeeet 8 10 8 5 Installation and Removal of the Base Units c ccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesnaeens 8 11 8 6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover cc ccecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeececnaeeeeeeeeeeeeesenesenaeees 8 14 Gel E E ETEO I T epee nce gules ea N S E ENI TEO EE E TIAE E T 8 16 BAr WNS UCO a R E A IAE R AAE 8 16 8 7 2 Wiring to module terminals ssiri enaa E a E E ERARE AE EEEE ETENEE A RETER IERA 8 21 8 8 Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS aaae 8 22 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 1to9 15 9 1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC Directives c ccccseccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 9 1 9 1 1 EMC Directive related standards c cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceanaecaeeeeeeeeeneeeteeeseees 9 2 9 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC directive cccececceeeecceccececeeeeeeeeeceeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesnnaees 9 3 QMS GCaD secs degs eei tear sce eeapivgdes E E E tack cin oategys ahanidee na dana exhaan seeder 9 4 9 1 4 Power Supply MOdule cccccccccccececeeecceceeceeeeeeeeee cece ceceaeaaeeeceeeeeeeeesescaaeaeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeees 9 9 O1s5 REINS CONG EE EEA ada rite Tete aa teect del acne ll cat qedbuel dy atadies dabic on E SE 9 9
10. 8193 to 10240 bytes 10k bytes 10241 to 12288 bytes 12k bytes 12289 to 14336 bytes 14k bytes 14337 to 16384 bytes 16k bytes 2 Ifthe MELSECNET II data link system is configured using a GPP function software package for the AnU 2k bytes for 1k step are occupied as a link parameter area 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 2 Storing order in the user memory Each data set by the parameters are stored in the order shown below Execute the memory protect after confirming that the write area during execution of the sequence program such as a file register is not in the range of memory protection a When the main program is made into EP ROM By making the main program into EP ROM the extension file register can be enlarged Applicable memory cassette A2SMCA 14KP 1 For A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 a During RAM operation b During EP ROM operation Parameter T C set value Sequence program MELSECNET 10 network parameters ROM memory capacity maximum 64k bytes Unusable Not used Parameter Change into a ROM 3k bytes 1k byte 1 to 30k steps Expansion comment T C set value Sampling trace area Sequence program MELSECNET 10 network parameters 2 to 60k bytes Memory area of the built in RAM 256k bytes Expansion comment Extension file register Sampling trace area Extension file register File register File r
11. Can the NO YES Is a ROM memory cassette used YES NO program be written Replace the EPROM memory cassette or use a built in RAM Can the NO YES Counstult your nearest Mitsubishi representative program be written Complete 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 9 Flow for actions when the CPU module is not started up The flow when the CPU module is not started up is described The CPU module is not started up See Flowchart for actions when the Is the power supply POWER LED is turned OFF module LED ON Refer to Section 11 2 2 Are all the power of the power supply modules ON Is the power suppl module wired correctly Review the wiring and turn the all power supply ON NO Is CPU module up ME Try to connect the peripheral device Is it available to communicate with the peripheral device YES Make the PLC diagnosis and execute the troubleshooting according to the result Connect the extension cable Y Is CPU module up Switch the RUN STOP key switch to RUN Is the extension cable connected to the incorrect direction Connected IN and IN or OUT and OUT NO Is the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module at RESET Not at RESET NO Is CPU module up X Switch the power supply module and confirm the LED lights YES Is CPU module up
12. Possible hardware errors are described below 1 CPU module y 2 Main base unit Extension base unit 3 Extension cable 4 Network module Only when installed For the malfunctioning module even after executed the serial operation check from the minimum system please consult at RESET Hardware error of the power supply your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 3 Error Code List When an error occurs while the programmable controller is running or during RUN error is displayed or error code detailed error code and error step are stored to special registers D9008 D9091 and D9010 respectively by the self diagnostics function Error definitions and corrective actions are shown below 11 3 1 Procedure to read an error code When an error occurs the error code can be read with a peripheral device Refer to the Operating Manuals of the peripheral device for operation method 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si A 11 3 2 Error code list for the ANUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board The following table shows the error messages error codes error definition and cause of error and corrective actions of detailed error codes The detailed error codes added to AnUCPU A2USCPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Table 11 1 Error Code List for the ANUCPU A2ZUS H CPU A2ZASCPU and A
13. b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Usable with AnN 4 4 AnA AnU A2AS A AnA board Step transfer Timer setting value E Timer setting QCPU A A a eure nape 1 to 255 sec Mode A2C in seconds A0J2H AnS F number setting AnSH A1FX and A52G By turning on any of M9108 to M9114 the monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 38 APPENDICES mms Si Number I O module verify error Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Bit pattern in units of 16 points of verify error units Details When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the I O unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 1514131211109 876543210 D9116 o o o o olojojofofofjoljo o o olrhy oorr folofolo ofo go o ofo o ofojolo D9123 o j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o o Turns on all the bits corresponding to the output module number in units of 16 points in output points occupied by the modules on modules with more than 16 output points Example On a module with 64 points attached
14. 0 6A Overcurrent 5 5A or higher 3 3A or higher 5 5A or higher protection 0 66A or higher Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection Efficiency Allowable momentary power failure period 65 or higher 1ms or lower 20ms or lower 24VDC or higher Between primary Dielectric and 5VDC withstand Between primary voltage and 24VDC 500VAC AC across input LG and output FG 2 830VAC rms 3 cycle elevation 2 000m 6562ft Insulation resistance Noise durability AC across input LG and output FG 10MQ or higher measures with a 500VDC insulation resistance tester T i Noise voltage 500Vp p e Noise voltage 1 500 Vp p Nioise width 1 us f S f K Noise width 1 us Noise Noise frequency 25 to 60Hz noise simulator condition frequency 25 to 60 Hz e Noise voltage IEC801 4 2kV noise simulator condition Operation indication LED indication ON for 5VCDC output Fuse Terminal screw size Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal Built in User cannot change M3 5 x 7 0 75 to 2mm RAV 1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 59 to 88N cm 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms SECO A Performance specifications A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P External dimensions 130mm 5 12inch x 55mm 2 17inch x 93 6mm 3 69inch Weight 0 60kg 0 60kg 0 50kg 4 Overcurrent protection The
15. HANDLING OF A2USCPU S1 1 ALF O F amp Switch settings Memory protect switch MPROAS UF OFT HA ON Memory protect area 144 256Kbytes 112 144Kbytes 96 112Kbytes 80 96Kbytes 64 80Kbytes 48 64Kbytes 32 48Kbytes 16 32Kbytes O 16Kbytes QUCQUUQUU 123456789 O 123456789 Paikkaa njola jajojx ojo ec0000000000 000000000000 Et Ely 2 NYT UO BHR Change battery ZEISS ULAICATO TEAL Change the battery within 5 minutes KARRAR Date fornet X M D change BD990C955H02 o O 10 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si 11 TROUBLESHOOTING The description cause determination and corrective actions of each error which may occur during system usage are described 11 1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting Besides using obviously highly reliable devices to increase system reliability it is an important point to quickly start up the system again when an error occurs In order to quickly start up the system find the cause of the problem and resolve it There are the following three basic points to be aware of when performing troubleshooting 1 Visual confirmation Confirm the following points a Machine operation stop status and operation status b Power supply ON OFF c I O equipment status d Wiring status I O wires and ca
16. Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing Usable with AnA and AnU I O module error detection OFF Normal ON Error Turned on when one of I O modules has become a faulty station Communication error is detected when normal communication is not restored after the number of retries set at D9174 Turned off when communication with all 1 0 modules is restored to normal with automatic online return enabled Remains on when automatic online return is disabled Not turned on or off when communication is suspended at error detection Usable with A2C and A52G How to set the control function of remote I O modules and remote terminal units OFF Setting by parameters ON Setting in the sequence program Turned on upon setting in the sequence program Usable with A2C and A52G Output at line error OFF All outputs are turned off ON Outputs are retained Sets whether all outputs are turned off or retained at communication error OFF All outputs are turned off at communication error ON Outputs before communication error are retained APP 19 Usable with A2C and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Number Time required for search of A8UPU A8PUJ Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Reading time reduction OFF ON Reading time reduction ON Details e Turn on to reduce the
17. 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the programmable controller E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even when line voltage is maximum 2 Wiring I O equipments N CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 9inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise a The applicable wire size for a terminal block connector is 0 75 to 2mm It is recommended to use wire of 0 75mm for easy use b Run the input line and output line away from each other c Run the I O signal line including common line away from the main circuit line with high voltage or large current by more than 100mm 3 94inch d When the main circuit line and power line cannot be separated use a batch shielding cable and ground it on the programmable controller side However ground it on the opposite side in some cases Programmable controller Shielded cable eee Shield jacket DC e When cables are run through pipes securely ground the pipes f Separate the 24VDC I O wires from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines g With a long distance wiring of 200m 656 2ft or longer leak current due to line capacity may cause troubles h As a measure ag
18. 2 A1S62PN MELSECA1S62PN POWER MITSUBISHI INPUT 100 240VAC 105VA 50 60Hz Description OUTPUT 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A O 24V O 24G 5b Slee On INPUT O _ 100p240vac A1S62PN 24VDC 24GDC terminal wiring Used to supply 24VDC power supply to inside the output module using external FG terminal LG terminal The ground terminal connected to the shielding pattern of the printed circuit board Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms SECO A 3 A1S63P MELSECA1S63P POWER QO MITSUBISHI INPUT OUTPUT DC15 6 31 2V DC 5V 5A Description Power input terminal Used to connect a 24VDC power supply Power input terminal Used to connect 100VAC to 240VAC power supply Terminal screw M3 5x7 Terminal cover A protective cover for the terminal block Used to fix a module to the base unit Module mounting screw M4 screw tightening torque 59 to 88N cm 1 Do not cable to the unused terminals such as FG and LG on the terminal block terminals whose name is not printed on the terminal cover 2 The protective ground terminal LG must be grounded 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms E Si 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1 Specifications This section explains the specifications of the base units the main and extension ba
19. A1SJ71BR11 installed A1SJ71LR21 AJ71PT32 S3 Only when the extension mode is used AJ71T32 S3 Only when the extension mode is used A1SJ71PT32 S3 Up to 10 modules in total can be A1SJ71AR21 1 installed Up to 4 modules Only when the extension mode is used installed A1SJ71PT32 S3 Only when the extension mode is used 4 Accessible within the device range of ASACPU Refer to the user s manual of the corresponding special function module for the accessible device ranges 2 Refer to the following manual for the GOT model names GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Work2 Versions2 GT Designer2 Version2 Compatible Connection System Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A c When a remote I O network is constructed with the MELSECNET 10 network system use the AZUSHCPU S1 software of version A or later and the AJ71LP21 LR21 BR11 A1SJ71LP21 BR11 type network software of version J or later lt Example gt For AJ71LP21 BR11 Software version Hardware version Front side of the module d When a remote I O network is constructed with the MELSECNET 10 network system use the AZUSCPU S1 AZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 software of version D or later the AZASCPU S30 software of version L or later and the AJ71LP21 LR21 BR11 A1SJ71LP21 BR11 type network software of version J or later lt Example gt For AJ71LP21 BR11 Software version Hardware ve
20. A1SJ71E71N B2 10 Base 2 for Cheapernet 32 special points A1SJ71E71N B5 10 Base 5 for Ethernet 32 special points Only AnACPU equivalent device range accessible Intelligent communication module A1SD51S BASIC interpreter compiler RS 232C 2 channel RS 422 RS485 1 channel 32 special points 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ems ELS EC A Product Name Positioning module Model Name A1SD70 Description 1 axis positioning control speed control and speed positioning control analog voltage output for speed positioning control 0 to 10V Number of occupied points points I O allocation module type 48 First half 16 empty points Second half 32 special points Current Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Remark A1SD75P1 S3 For positioning control pulse output 1 axis 32 special points A1SD75P2 S3 For positioning control pulse output 2 axis independent 2 axis simultaneous linear interpolation circular interpolation 32 special points A1SD75P3 S3 For positioning control pulse output 3 axis independent 3 axis simultaneous 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation 32 special points When different driver is connected 0 78A A1SD75M1 A1SD75M2 A1SD75M3 For positioning control digital output for MR H B MR J B MR J2 B 1 axis SSCNET For positioning control digital outpu
21. APPENDICES mms Si Number Sequence accumulation time measurement Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Time not elapsed ON Time elapsed Details Compares the setting value at D9077 with the time elapsed from the start of measurement accumulation time at every scan Then performs the following operations Setting value gt Accumulation time Turns M9077 ON and clears the accumulation time Setting value lt Accumulation time Turns M9077 from ON to OFF and clears the accumulation time When M9077 is already OFF clears the accumulation time When 1 to 255 is designated at D9077 M9077 is turned ON at the first scan When the value other than 1 to 255 is designated at D9077 the value in D9077 is reset to 0 and M9077 is always turned OFF Applicable CPU Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Test mode request error flag OFF No error ON Error e Turned on when test mode is not available though a test mode request was made from a peripheral device Turned off if test mode becomes available by making another test mode request Dedicated to A73 Servo program setting error flag OFF No data error ON Data error e Turned on when the positioning data of the servo program designated by the DSFRP instruction has an error Turned off when the data has no error after the DSFRP instruction is executed again Dedicated to A73 BUSY flag for execution
22. ROM memory capacity maximum 64k bytes Unusable MELSECNET 10 network parameters Not used Change into a ROM 4 Unusable Parameter T C set value 3k bytes 1k byte 1 to 30k steps 2 to 60k bytes Sequence program Memory area of the built in RAM 256k bytes Expansion comment Extension file register MELSECNET 10 network parameters Sampling trace area File register Comment Extension file register Used on the system Expansion comment Sampling trace area Extension file register File register Comment Extension file register 2 For A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 a During RAM operation ROM memory capacity maximum 64k bytes Unusable 3k bytes 1k byte 1 to 14k steps 2 to 28k bytes Parameter T C set value Sequence program MELSECNET 10 Memory area of the built in RAM A2USCPU A2ASCPU 64k bytes A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S1 256k bytes network parameters Sampling trace area File register lo Expansion comment Extension file register Comment Extension file register Change into a ROM b During E7PROM operation Parameter T C set value Sequence program MELSECNET 10 network parameters Not used ba Unusable Used on the system A2USCPU A2ASCPU 64k bytes
23. RY Leakage current 1 11 26 Start the relay first then start the CR type timer at the contact In some timers internal circuit may be half wave rectification type so the caution as to the example 1 is necessary here Resister Calculate the constant of the resistance based on the load 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A E SECO A Situation Table 11 3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions Continued Countermeasure Erroneous output due to the stray capacitance C between collector and emitter of hotocoupler When the external power turns ON OFF check that the external power supply rising edge must be 10ms or more and There is no erroneous output at normal road switch the SW1 to the primary side of An erroneous output may occur at high sensitivity load external power supply such as solid state relay Primary Secondary Output module Combined module side side On external power supply gt gt swi1 PLC When switching to the secondary side of Photocoupler the external power supply is required the external power supply rising edge connected a condenser must be slow and measured 10ms or more YO Constant l voltage circuit 1 If the external power supply is turned on precipitously Ic R1 When the P pp y precipitously CTL Ss external power c
24. TO to T255 Default value TO to T199 100ms T200 to T255 10ms Setting range A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 A2USCPU A2ASCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 256 points by 100ms 10ms and retentive timers in 8 point units Timers are serial numbered T256 to T2047 1792 points by 100ms 10ms and retentive timers in 16 point units Timers are serial numbered Devices set D R W Setting required if 257 points or more Interrupt counter setting Sets whether to use interrupt counter C224 to C225 or not Points used 256 points CO to C255 0 to 1024 points in 16 point units Devices set D R W Setting required if 257 points or more I O assignment Input module output module special function module empty slot 0 to 64 points in 16 point units Module model name registration is possible Remote RUN PAUSE contact setting XO to X1FFF RUN PAUSE 1 point PAUSE contact setting is not only allowed Operating mode when there is an error Fuse blown Module comparison error Continue Stop Computation error Continue Special function access error Stop Stop Continue Data communication request batch processing None Yes No Output mode switching at STOP RUN Output data at time of STOP restored Output before STOP after operation Print title regisration 128 characters Keyword registrat
25. a b c f 4k a b c f Block No 8 16k bytes 16k d e Block No 7 16k bytes 32k d e Number of extension file registers n can be Block No 6 16k bytes 48k d e determined by the rest of the memory capacity Extension file Block No 5 16k bytes 64k d e after storing parameters register 3 T C set values main Block No 4 16k bytes 80k d e programs MELSECNET 10 network parameters file registers Block No 3 16k bytes 96k d e 16k d e 4 Block No 2 16k bytes 112k d e 32k d e comments Block No 1 16k bytes 128k d e 48k d e File register aj 144k d e 64k d e Comment e 144k e 64k e Block No 16 16k bytes 144k Block No 15 16k bytes 160k Block No 14 16k bytes 176k Extension fil xtension file Block No 13 16k bytes 192k register 8 Block No 12 16k bytes 208k Block No 11 16k bytes 224k Block No 10 16k bytes 4 CPU MODULE ees ELS EC A 1 2 3 4 Can be confirmed at GX Developer Memory capacity of Parameter Expanded comment can be allocated to the empty area of RAM memory area usable for parameter range When setting the capacity exceeded the empty area the total capacity is allocated from block No 10 in order in the extension file register An area block that is stored area in the expanded comment ca
26. 10 to 57Hz 0 035mm 0 001in 57 to 150Hz 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 4 CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specifications Performance specifications of CPU modules are shown below 1 A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 Performance specifications Model Remark A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 Control method Sequence program control method Instructions to enable O control mode Refresh mode partial direct I O are available Language dedicated to sequence control Programming language Relay symbol language logic symbol language MELSAP II SFC Processing speed sequence instruction 0 09 Us step 0 2 Us step Constant scanning Set in special register Can bi t bet 10 d 190 10 ts Program startup with a specified interval a aa PSS ED D9020 A2SNMCA 30KE 64k bytes installation possible Pe 256k bytes 64k bytes 256k bytes Memory capacity built in RAM built in RAM built in RAM Main sequence Program capacity program steps Max 30k steps Max 14k steps Set in parameters Sub sequence program None The number of points usable in the program Number of I O device points 8192 points X YO to X Y1FFF The number of points 1024 points 512 points 1024 points which can be used for X YO to X Y 3FF X Y0 to X Y 1FF X YO to X Y 3FF accessibility to 1 O modules Number of I O points Each memory capacity for the programm
27. 112 113 l14 115 8 Voltage drop at slot 6 Ve Ve 0 007x l6 I7 Is l9 h10 114 112 113 14 115 9 Voltage drop at slot 7 V7 V7 0 007x I7 l8 l9 l10 41 12 113 114 115 10 Total voltage drop at the main base unit Vk Vk Vcpu Vo V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 Ve V7 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms Si A b Voltage drop calculation on the extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 The resistive value on the extension base unit is 0 006 per slot Calculate the voltage drop of each slot and obtain the total voltage drop 1 Voltage drop at slot 8 Vs V8 0 006 x I8 l9 l140 141 12 113 114 115 2 Voltage drop at slot 9 V V 0 006x l9 l40 I41 1 113 l14 115 3 Voltage drop at slot 10 V10 V10 0 006x I10 111 112 113 114 115 4 Voltage drop at slot 11 V11 V11 0 006 x I11 112 113 114 l15 5 Voltage drop at slot 12 V12 V12 0 006 x I12 113 14 115 6 Voltage drop at slot 13 V13 V13 0 006 x l13 114 115 7 Voltage drop at slot 14 V14 V14 0 006 x 114 115 8 Voltage drop at slot 15 V15 V15 0 006 x115 9 Total voltage drop at the extension base unit Vz Vz V8 Vo V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 c Calculation of voltage drop through the extension cable 1 Total current consumption of the extension base unit Iz Iz Ig lo 10 1114 112 l13 l14 115 2 Voltage drop of the extension ca
28. 130mm 5 12inch x 54 5mm 2 15inch x 93 6mm 3 69inch 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 2 A2ACPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 Performance specifications Model A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 Control method Sequence program control method Instructions to enable O control mode Refresh mode partial direct I O are available Language dedicated to sequence control Programming language Relay symbol language logic symbol language MELSAP II SFC Processing speed sequence instruction 0 2 Us step Constant Set i ial regist uaa i AA Can be set between 10ms and 190ms in 10ms increments S A SPRATT Program startup with a specified interval D9020 A2SNMCA 30KE 64k bytes installation possible 64k bytes 256k bytes Ps Memory capacity built in RAM built in RAM Main sequence Program capacity program steps Max 14k steps Max 30k steps Set in parameters Sub sequence program None The number of points usable in the program Number of I O device points 8192 points X YO to X Y1FFF The number of points 512 points which can be used for 1024 points X YO to X Y 3FFF X Y0 to X Y 1FFF points Pena te accessibility to I O modules Number of I O points 4 Each memory capacity for the PLCs is the sum total of the parameters T C setting values program capacities file registers comment points sampling traces and status latches The memory
29. 4 33 Settings for memory protect switch 4 47 Settings for memory protection switch 7 5 Software Package cceeeeeceeesseeeeeeeeesteeeeeeees 2 7 Special register D cceeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 2 4 5 Special relay M cecceceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 Special relays and special registers with different specification S sussana App 53 Specifications Battery specifications cc eeeeeereeeereees 7 6 Extension cable specifications 05 6 2 Performance Specifications 0000 4 1 SPECIFICATIONS oiiaii 3 1 Specifications of the memory cassette 7 1 Standard LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 1 9 12 Step relay S eseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 STEPSRUWN essaiar 4 10 Surge absorber for lightening e 8 18 System configuration Precautions When Configuring the System 2 3 System Configuration Overview 0 2 28 System Equipment ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 12 T Timer T eanan 4 2 4 5 Troubleshooting flowchart Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON ccccceceeeeeeseeeeeee 11 8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be WAEI seiicc cnet Sestnnnce aaraa iA 11 9 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is MIGKOMNG E E EET 11 7 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is tumed ON lirria ai aaa 11 6 Flow for actions when the POWER
30. A2C and A52G Usable with AnA A2AS QCPU A A Mode AnU A2C and A52G Final connected station number Time check time Final connected station number 1 s to 65535 s Stores the final station number of remote I O modules and remote terminal modules connected to A2C and A52G e Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 e Setting unit 1s Default value 10 s If 0 has been set default 10 s is applied Usable with A2C and A52G Usable with AnU and A2AS QCPU A A Mode Microcomputer subroutine input data area head device number Depends on the micro computer program package to be used e For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package Unusable with AnA A2AS QCPU A A Mode and Anu Instruction error Instruction error detail number Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error Usable with AnA A2AS QCPU A A Mode AnA board and AnU Microcomputer subroutine call error code Depends on the micro computer program package to be used For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package APP 36 Unusable with AnA A2AS QCPU A A Mode AnA board and Anu Number APPENDICES mms Si SFC program detail error number Table App2 2 Special Register List Con
31. A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S1 Expansion comment Sampling trace area 14k bytes Extension file register File register Comment Extension file register If the MELSECNET II data link system is configured using a GPP function software package for the AnU 2k bytes for 1k step are occupied as a link parameter area 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A Note that the sequence program can use only up to 22k steps when the maximum 16k bytes are used for the MELSECNET 10 network parameters The memory area for the sequence program for AAUSHCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 is the same as that for MELSECNET 10 Therefore the remainder which is subtracted the memory area used by the MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 parameters from the max 30k steps can be used for the sequence program 4 CPU MODULE ees ELSE A c Stored address of user memory Data address for storing to RAM memory can be calculated as follows Note that confirm the data destination address as follows so as not to protect the data destination switched 1 During RAM operation Head address for storing to RAM memory Memory A2USHCPU S1 a capacity A2USCPU S1 A2USCPU Remark A2ASCPU S30 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Parameter T C set value 4k bytes Ok Sequence program a 4k Main program Microcomputer program by 4k a MELSECNET 10 network parameter i 4k a b 4k a b Expanded comment 4k a b c 4k a b c Not used area 4k
32. Cannot be used because Main program used in the system Microcomputer program b Stored to E PROM Stored to E PROM MELSECNET 10 network parameter c Stored to E PROM Stored to E PROM Expanded comment 2 4k a b c 4k a b c Not used area 4k a b c f 4k a b c f Block No 8 16k bytes 16k d e Block No 7 16k bytes 32k d e Number of extension file registers n can be Block No 6 16k bytes 48k d e determined by the rest of the memory capacity after storing parameters 3 T C set values main register Block No 4 16k bytes 80k d e programs MELSECNET 10 network parameters file registers Extension file Block No 5 16k bytes 64k d e Block No 3 16k bytes 96k d e 16k d e 4 Block No 2 16k bytes 112k d e 32k d e comments Block No 1 16k bytes 128k d e 48k d e File register 144k d e 64k d e Comment ej 144k e Block No 16 16k bytes 144k Block No 15 16k bytes 160k Block No 14 16k bytes 176k Extension fil x enion ile Block No 13 16k bytes 192k register 3 Block No 12 16k bytes 208k Block No 11 16k bytes 224k Block No 10 16k bytes Can be confirmed at GX Developer Memory capacity of Parameter 2 Expanded comment can be allocated to the empty area of RAM memory area us
33. STEP RUN Error display Present Error Error Jump FUSE BREAK OFF 1 Help Error message Error log UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT LAY ERR Error Jump Clear Log Help Error information confirmation screen of GX Developer Target error code error message 1 Detail 2 Error step I O module verify error module 31 UNIT VERIFY ERR 4 0 is displayed No Content of D9002 4 32 FUSE BREAK OFF Fuse blown module No 0 is displayed Content of D9000 Detailed error code Content of 44 SP UNIT LAY ERR D9091 1 0 slot No 2 1 The module No to be displayed is the numerical value expressing the first 2 digits of head I O number 3 digits in hexadecimal in decimal Example The value 32 is displayed in Detail column of the error code 31 in above 1 When expressing it in hexadecimal 32 decimal gt 20 hexadecimal and then expressing it in 3 digits 20 2 digits gt 200 3 digits Module No of error target 2 The I O slot No can be checked by monitoring the parameter setting of theperipheral device The following values shown in frame in solid line are slot No A parameter Memory capacity PLC Ras PLc system 1 0 assignment Device Sji E gt 212 FGGG lelejzla i om Ga om a 5 6 e on ao EN 12 EE u E E Lis AHEL ELLEELLE ELEL 4 JJJ
34. Turned ON when a test mode request is made from a peripheral device Reset when test mode is finished Dedicated to A73 Successful completion of writing to built in ROM OFF Failed writing to ROM ON Successfully completed writing to ROM Turned on when writing to the built in ROM is successfully completed This status is stored in D9075 Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode External emergency stop input flag OFF External emergency stop input is on External emergency stop input is off Turned off when the external emergency stop input connected to the EMG terminal of A70SF is turned on Turned on when the external emergency stop input is turned off Dedicated to A73 Clock data read request OFF No procesing ON Read request is made When M9076 is ON clock data is read out to D9073 to D9076 in BCD values Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Status of writing to built in ROM OFF Writing to ROM disabled ON Writing to ROM enabled Turns ON when writing to built in ROM is enabled Turns ON when DIP switch and M9073 are ON Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Manual pulse generator axis setting error flag OFF All axes normal ON Error axis detected Turned on when there is an error in the contents of manual pulse generator axis setting Turned off if all axes are normal when the manual pulse generator enable flag is turned on APP 20 Dedicated to A73
35. When the send data storage device is set to B60 the device range will be B60 to BBF If a bit device is specified as the send received data storage device the device number set must be a multiple of 16 lt Example gt X0 X10 X100 MO M16 M256 BO B10 B100 Device range used is 8 points x Number of stations When the number of stations is an odd number extra 8 points are necessary 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 3 Function List Various functions of the CPU modules are explained below Function application Constant scan Program execution at constant intervals Simplified positioning Description e Makes the processing time for a single scan in the sequence program constant Set the processing time within the range of 10ms to 190ms by 10ms Overview of setting and operation e Write to the special register D9020 by the sequence program Latch power failure compensation Continuous control by data retention on power failure When the power supply failure of 20ms or the longer CPU reset power supply off occur data contents of the devices for which latches have been set up in advance are retained Latch enabled devices L B T C D W Latched data are stored in the CPU main module and backed up by the batteries of the CPU main module e Latch device and latch range are specified by setting of the peripheral device parameters Auto refresh of MELSECNET MIN
36. mm inch App 66 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix5 5 Memory cassette Appendix5 5 1 A2SNMCA 30KE memory cassette 69 6 2 74 57 6 2 27 Cd ae oF 64 6 2 54 T 3yoe 15 0 59 Unit mm inch App 67 APPENDICES mms Si Appendix6 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to handle them based on the transportation regulations Appendix6 1 Relevant models The batteries used for CPU modules are classified as follows Product Name Model Name Handling Category A series battery A6BAT Lithium battery Non dangerous goods App 68 APPENDICES mms Si Appendix6 2 Transportation Guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 69 APPENDICES mms S ECO Appendix7 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states Appendix7 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separ
37. mms ELS EC A Appendix5 3 Main base unit Appendix5 3 1 A18S32B main base unit 4 mounting screws M5X25 Wg j Wa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION j ese L ee fa Y 220 8 66 Dy Unit mm inch Appendix5 3 2 A1S33B main base unit 4 mounting screws ane SRN Unit mm inch App 60 APPENDICES MELSEC A Appendix5 3 3 A1S35B main base unit 4 mounting screws M525 d i Tio Ma A i Mes MITSUBISHI ELECTRIG CORPORATION BD626E680G52 CJ a MADE IN JAPAN m 1 j aa N ILe 16 4 28 0 64 1 10 325 12 79 Appendix5 3 4 A1S38B main base unit Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws a Wo Wai Mee Meas We Wes els Mal POWER MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION BD626E680652 oO POWER MADE IN JAPAN 410 16 14 t 16 4 430 16 93 28 0 64 Unit mm inch App 61 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix5 4 Extension base unit Appendix5 4 1 A1S65B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5X25 6 E A Gio We Mee ms 7 P 0 WE R MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION si 16 4 28 0 64 315 12 40 Seer Re Gon REE Appendix5 4 2 A1S68B extension base unit 1 10 Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws M525 Tio i E Ws Mee POWER wrsvee eectac i BD626E680652 oO MADE IN JAPAN 400 15 74 16 4 420 16 53 28 0 64 Unit mm inch App 62 APP
38. of the module by the I O To realize functions of this utility package dedicated instructions for the special assignment function modules are provided for the AZUSHCPU S1 A2ZUSCPU S1 and By the system FD compatible A2ASCPU S1 S30 with the AZUSHCPU S1 To use the dedicated instructions of the A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 and A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 model names of the modules must be registered by the I O A2ASCPU S1 S30 assignment of the parameters in advance Conclusion When the AD57 or AD57 S1 exists be sure to register the model name of the module by the system FD which is compatible with the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 The processing of the following items is different from the parameter setting of the existing CPU module e Watchdog timer setting The set time is ignored and 200ms is applied e Interrupt counter setting The interrupt counter set by the A1SHCPU and A2SHCPU are ignored and treated as a normal counter by the sequence program App 54 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix4 4 1 O control method The I O control method of the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 is the refresh method partial direct I O depending on the instruction and is different from that of the A1SHCPU and A2SHCPU Therefore pay attention to the input timing of the input X and the output timing of the output Y 1 Pulse processing program by the SET RST instruction To make the A2Z
39. the default values will become as follows Normal counter CO to C255 Normal counter C256 to C1024 A counter which can be setup as an interrupt counter must be in the range C244 to C255 only and any counters outside the range cannot be set up The setup is made with parameters in C224 to C255 by one point for the interrupt counter Any counter in the range C224 to C255 which is not set up as an interrupt counter can be used as a normal counter 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A The interrupt counters in C224 to C255 are allocated to the interrupt pointers 10 to 131 as shown below and count the occurrences of interrupts by those of l0 to 131 Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt pointer counter pointer counter pointer counter pointer counter d The counter use points can be set arbitrarily by 16 points using the serial numbers By setting the counter which points to the number actually used the counter processing time subsequent to the END instruction can be shortened e The counter set values are as follows CO to C255 constant or word device D C256 to C1023 word device D W R Allocate a storage device for the set value by setting parameters When the timer use points are set to 257 points or more or the counter use points are set to 257 points or more the set value storage devices D W R specified at the time of timer counter
40. the setting is not necessary When the setting is executed ignore it Sets the devices to store the received send data for batch refresh Specify the head number of the device Occupies a part of the device area as the auto refresh area from the head of the device for the number of stations When setting the total number of remote I O stations to 64 occupies 8 points station x 64 stations 512 points bit device 2 Use of X Y remote I O range is recommended for devices Sets the number of retries upon the communication errors occurrence Error is not output when the communication is restored within the number of the retries set 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A Continued I O signal Buffer memory from the address of the master master module module Y n 1A FROM TO response specification Setting range Link priority CPU priority Priority selection of access to the master module buffer memory Description 1 Link priority Link access by MINI S3 has the priority During the link access FROM TO is caused to wait e Possible to read out the received data refreshed at the same timing The maximum wait time 0 3ms 0 2ms x number of separate refresh stations for the FROM TO instruction may be generated 2 CPU priority Access by FROM TO instruction of CPU has the priority Even during the link access it interrupts and accesses Depending on the timing received data in th
41. to OUI BF 9F AF BF CF1 OF EF FF Extension cable m Slot No Tst extension 3 tage UNIT il L Extension base unit for A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 200 240 280 2C0 300 340 3rd extension stage UNIT TET Qj 2o om2 Extension base unit A1S68B S1 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 9 Kl Power supply 23F to to to to to to to to 18F 19F1AF 1BF1CF 1DF1EF 1FF 180 190 1A0 whoo ee modute Power supply 3rd extension stage 1st extension stage Maximum number of I O modules 16 modules Maximum number of I O points Main base unit model name 1024 points A1832B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B Extension base unit model name A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S52B S1 A62B A65B A68B A52B A55B A58B A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 Extension cable model name A1SC03B A1SC07B A1SC12B A1SC30B ne A1SCOSNB A1SCO7NB A1SC30NB A1SC50NB A1SC01B right side installation A1SC60B I O number assignment When I O assignment is not performed 1 Only one AO N ADA extension base can be used The second extension module cannot be used 2 When the extension base A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A58B S1 or A52B A
42. 1 65 kQ IR Supposing that the resistance R is 1 5kQ the power capacity W of resistor R is W Input voltage R 26 47 1500 0 465 W 3 Connect a resistor of 1 5 k and 2 to 3 W to a terminal which may cause an error since the power capacity of a resistor is selected so that it will be 3 to 5 times greater than the actual power consumption 4 Also OFF voltage when resistor R is connected will be as follows 1 1 1 1 5 kQ 3 3 kQ e This satisfies 4V or less OFF voltage of A1SX40 x 3 mA 3 09 V 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 4 2 Faults in the output circuit Faults concerning output circuits and the corrective actions are explained Table 11 3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions Situation Countermeasure e When the load is subjected to half wave e Connect a resistor with several tens to rectification inside several hundreds of kQ to the both ends of Solenoids have these types the load Output module with the output element but the diode built A1SY22 _ With this kind of usage there is no problem in to the load may deteriorate and burn out An excessive voltage is applied to the load when 1 Resister output is off Example When the polarity of the power supply is 1 C is charged and when the polarity is 2 the voltage charged in C voltage of the power supply are applied to the both ends of D1 The maximum
43. 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Do not touch any terminal during power distribution Doing so may cause an electric shock Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst and or ignition Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Failure to do so may result in an electric shock If they are too loose it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions J N WARNING When performing online operations especially program modification forced output N CAUTION 7 l or operating status change by connecting a peripheral device to the running CPU module read the manual carefully and ensure the safety Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify each of modules Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire When using a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone keep a distance of 25cm 9 84inch or more from the programmable controller in all directions Failure to do so may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the externa
44. 128k d e 48k d e File register d 144k d e 64k d e Comment ej 144k e 64k e Block No 16 16k bytes 144k Block No 15 16k bytes 160k Block No 14 16k bytes Extension fil tension He Block No 13 16k bytes register 3 Block No 12 16k bytes Block No 11 16k bytes Block No 10 16k bytes 4 Can be confirmed at GX Developer Memory capacity of Parameter 2 Expanded comment can be allocated to the empty area of RAM memory area usable for parameter range When setting the capacity exceeded the empty area the total capacity is allocated from block No 10 in order in the extension file register An area block that is stored area in the expanded comment cannot be used as an extension file register 3 Sampling trace data and status latch data are stored to the area of the extension file register The stored block Nos are specified at GX Developer Parameter 4 A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 AZASCPU S1 144k 4k a b c d e f 16k n A2USCPU A2ASCPU _ 64k 4k a b c d e f 16k n 4 29 4 CPU MODULE ems ELS EC A 3 When operating the E PROM Head address for storing to RAM memory Memory A2USHCPU S1 i capacity A2USCPU S1 A2USCPU Remark A2ASCPU S30 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Parameter T C set value 4k bytes Stored to E PROM Stored to E PROM Sequence program a 2 2 q prog a Stored to EPROM Stored to EPROM
45. 3 2 Section 11 2 1 11 2 8 11 3 2 11 4 1 11 4 2 Appendix 2 1 2 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 6 3 Section 11 2 9 Section 7 1 4 May 2007 IB NA 66789 E Section 4 2 2 4 5 1 8 7 1 8 7 2 9 1 3 9 2 7 10 3 1 11 4 2 Wan Section 9 1 7 Section 6 2 Appendix 5 4 1 Appendix 5 4 3 Appendix 5 4 4 Appendix 5 4 5 Appendix 5 4 8 Appendix 5 4 9 Appendix 5 4 10 Oct 2008 IB NA 66789 G SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 3 Section 7 2 1 Appendix 7 7 1 7 2 Print Daie Manual Number Sep 2009 IB NA 66789 H Ba PLC was changed to programmable controller Chapter 3 Section 7 2 1 7 2 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 11 4 1 Mar 2010 IB NA 66789 I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 7 2 8 1 8 6 8 7 1 Chapter 10 Section 10 3 11 3 2 Appendix 2 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Jan 2011 IB NA 66789 J Section 4 1 4 8 8 Capter 9 Section 9 1 to 9 1 8 Appendix 2 3 Japanese Manual Version SH 3631 M This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor dose it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1997 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable logic controller MELSEC A Series Prior to use please read this manual thoroughly to fully under
46. 30m 98 43ft long Floppy disk for storing user programs User fl disk SWOS USER 2HD t peed SIS ype 3 5 inch pre formatted Cleaning floppy disk SW0 FDC For A6GPP A6PHP_ Floppy disk for cleaning the floppy disk drive A6KB keyboard Optional keyboard for ACO3R4H 0 3m 0 98ft long connection cable between A6KB A6PHP eres and A6PHP Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB A6KB keyboard Optional keyboard for AGKB SET ACO3R4L 0 3m 0 98ft long connection cable between A6KB A6GPP and A6GPP Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB 2 Product Name Printer RS232C cable SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Model Name K6PR K A7NPR S1 AC30R2 For printing out program circuit diagrams and various lists Connection cable for between A6GPP A6PHP and printer K6PR K A7NPR S1 and a general purpose printer with RS 232C interface 3m 9 84ft long Printer paper Printer paper for KEPR S1 and K6PR K 9 inch paper 2000 sheets per unit Printer paper for A7PR and A7NPR 11 inch paper 2000 sheets per unit Inked ribbon for K6PR kK Replacement inked ribbon for KEPR K Programming unit Read write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module with a RS 422 cable AC30R4 PUS 5VDC 0 4A Read write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module or a RS 422 cable AC30R4 PUS AC20R4 A8PU 5VDC 0 4A RS 422 cable AC30R4 PUS Con
47. 66257 character generators 2 SW OD UTLP FNO 1 eeeeeeeeeeeeeees AnSHCPU AnACPU AnUCPUQCPU A A mode Programming Manual Dedicated Instructions IB 66251 3 SW O UTLP PID 0000 AnACPU AnUCPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions IB66258 4 SWO SIMA 5 SW UTLP FDI Unusable 6 SWO SAPA App 56 APPENDICES ems ELS EC A Appendix4 6 Processing of the index register The index register of the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 is rewritten to the value prior to the execution of the interrupt program when the processing is transferred to the main or sequence program even if the value was updated by the interrupt program MOV K5 Z No write instruction 1 1 Z 0 Main sequence program Interrupt Interrupt occurred occurred PEO zta hoon zo Interrupt program ig a a E T a E 3 3 App 57 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix5 External Dimensions Appendix5 1 A2USHCPU S1 A2USHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 modules MASBEA2USHcPuU STOP RUN OL CLR RUN ERROR RESET RESET MITSUBISHI Vv 6 5 93 6 3 68 54 5 2 14 0 25 Unit mm inch App 58 APPENDICES MELSEC A Appendix5 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules MELSEC Aissipn POWERO MITSUBISHI 130 5 11 66 93 6 3 68 J 54 5 2 14 0 25 Unit mm inch App 59 APPENDICES
48. A1SX81 S2 32 point 24VDC sink source input module 32 input points A1SX82 S1 64 point 24VDC sink source input module 32 input points 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ems ELS EC A Number of occupied Current points points Consumption I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A Product Name Model Name Description Remark 16 output A1SY10 16 point relay contact output module 2A A points 16 output A1SY10EU 16 point relay contact output module 2A i points 16 output A1SY14EU 12 point relay contact output module 2A i points 8 point relay contact output module 2A for 16 output A1SY18A independent contacts points 8 point relay contact output module 2A for 16 output AISYISAEU independent contacts points 0 075 16 output 200VAC points 0 002 A1SY22 16 point triac output module 0 6A 8 point triac output module 1A 16 output A1SY28A All points independent points 16 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 16 output A1SY40 0 1A sink type points A1SY40P 16 point 12 24VDC transistor output module is output 0 1A sink type points 32 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 32 output A1SY41 0 1A sink type points Output module 32 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 32 output AISYAP 0 1A sink type points 64 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 64 output A1SY42 0 1A sink type points 16 point 12
49. APPENDICES mms l S ECO e Real value processing instructions BCD format processing BCD 4 digit square root BCD 8 digit square root SIN sine operation COS cosine operation TAN tangent operation SIN arcsine operation cos arccosine operation TAN arctangent operation f Real value processing instructions Floating point format real value processing SIN sine operation BSIN TAN tangent operation BTAN SIN arcsine operation BASIN cos arccosine operation BACOS TAN arctangent operation BATAN Square root SQR Exponential EXP Logarithm LOG App 7 APPENDICES mms S ECO g Text string processing instructions 16 32 bit BIN gt decimal ASCII conversion BINDA DBINDA 16 32 bit BIN hexadecimal ASCII conversion BINHA DBINHA 16 32 bit BCD decimal ASCII conversion BCDDA DBCDDA Decimal ASCII 16 32 bit BIN conversion DABIN DDABIN Hexadecimal ASCII 16 32 bit BIN conversion HABIN DHABIN Decimal ASCII 16 32 bit BCD conversion DABCD DDABCD Device data read COMRD Text string length detection LEN 16 32 bit BIN gt decimal text string conversion STR DSTR Decimal text string gt 16 32 bit BIN conversion VAL DVAL Hexadecimal data gt ASCII conversion ASC ASCII hexadecimal data conversion HEX Text string transfer SMOV Text string association SADD Text string comparison SCMP Separation in byte units WTOB By
50. CPU Sampling trace completion OFF During sampling trace ON Sampling trace completion Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed the number of times preset by parameter after STRA instruction is executed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed Unusable with A1 and A1N Sampling trace OFF ON STRA Same as execution ON OFF STRAR Same as execution Turning on off M9044 can execute STRA STRAR instruction M9044 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction The value stored in D9044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time Time 10 msec unit Unusable with A1 A1N AnA AnU and QCPU A A Mode Watchdog timer WDT reset OFF WDT not reset ON WDT reset Turn on M9045 to reset the WDT upon execution of a ZCOM instruction or data communication request batch process Use this function for scan times exceeding 200 ms APP 17 Unusable with A1 and A1N APPENDICES mms Si Number Sampling trace Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Except during trace ON During trace Details e Switched on during sampling trace Applicable CPU Unusable with A1 and A1N Sampling trace preparation OFF Sampling trace stop ON Sampling trace start e Turn on M9047 t
51. DXOR DXORP Two types each for WXNR WXNRP DXNR DXNRP NEG NEGP ROR RORP RCR RCRP DROR DRORP DRCR DRCRP ROL ROLP RCL RCLP DROL DROLP DRCL DRCLP SFR SFRP BSFR BSFRP DSFR DSFRP SFL SFLP BSFL BSFLP DSFL DSFLP APPENDICES MELSEC A d Data processing instructions 16 bit SUM SUMP Bit check 32 bit DSUM DSUMP Decode 16 bit SEG e FIFO instructions FIFW FIFWP FIFR FIFRP f ASCII instructions ASCII conversion ASC ASCII print PR two types PRC g Buffer memory access instructions Data read Data write h FOR to NEXT instruction i Display instructions j Data link module instructions App 5 APPENDICES mms Si k Other instructions WDT reset WDT WDTP Status latch SLT SLTR Sampling trace STRA STRAR Carry flag set reset STC CLC 4 Dedicated instructions a Direct processing instructions Direct output DOUT Direct set DSET Direct reset DRST b Structured program instructions Circuit index modification IX IXEND Repeat forced end BREAK Subroutine call FCALL Error check circuit pattern change CHK CHKEND c Data operation instructions 32 bit data search DSER 16 bit upper lower byte swap SWAP Data separation DIS Data association UNI Bit test TEST DTEST d I O operation instructions Flip flop control FF Numeral key input from keyboard KEY App 6
52. FCN A6CON3 Press fit type flat cable A6CON4 Soldering type straight diagonal out A6CON1E Soldering type straight out 3 pin D sub A6CON2E Solderless t traight out S t 37p D sub connector olderless type straight ou ource type 37p D sub A6CON3E Press fit type flat cable REMARK Toa Electric Industrial CO LTD provides I O cables with connectors which can connect to 40 pin connector A1SX41 A1SX42 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY42 A1SY42P etc or 37 pin D sub connector A1SX81 A1SY81 of I O modules Contact TOA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL CO LTD 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 Peripheral device Product Name Model Name A6PHP main unit SW O GP GPPA GPP function start up floppy disk for the A series A6PHP SET SW O GP GPPK GPP function start up floppy disk for the K series SWO GPPU User floppy disk 2DD AC30R4 3m 9 84ft long RS 422 cable Plasma hand held graphic programmer A6GPP main unit SW O GP GPPA GPP function start up floppy disk for the A series Intelligent GPP A6GPP SET SW O GP GPPK GPP function start up floppy disk for the K series SWO GPPU User floppy disk 2DD AC30R4 3m 9 84ft long RS 422 cable Composite video cable AC1OMD e Connection cable for the monitor display of the A6GPP screen 1m 3 28ft long AGIRA Smi 9 B4ft long Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A6GPP A6PHP RS 422 cable AC300R4
53. LED is tumed OFF tyes cecdscndactacitdeaateeeuseteardeleateaaed 11 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is flickering E E T E T 11 5 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFT eenn rei eiaa A 11 4 W Weight CPU module ccccccesseseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 3 4 6 Extension cable eeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeteees 6 2 Memory cassette 00 0 cceceeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 7 1 Wiring Wiring I O equipments 0ceeees 8 19 Wiring to the module terminals 8 21 Wiring I O equipments c cccceeeeeeeeeeeee 8 19 Wiring to the module terminals 2 08 8 21 Numerics 5VDC internal power consumption 4 3 4 6 Index 3 Memo WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the fail
54. N N REE Input the model name in 9 single byte or fewer characters Acknowledge XY assignment Default Check End Cancel Parameter setting screen of GX Developer 4 14 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 When the self diagnostics detects an error the module will be in one of the two modes below e Mode wherein operation of the PLC is stopped e Mode wherein operation of the PLC continues In addition there are errors with which the operation can be selected to stop or to continue by the parameter setting a When an operation stop error is detected by the self diagnostics the operation is stopped at the time of detection of the error and sets the all outputs Y to OFF b When an operation continued error is detected the only part of the program with the error is not executed while the all other part is executed Also in case of module verify error the operation is continued using the I O address prior to the error When an error is detected error occurrence and error contents are stored in the special relay M and special register D so that in case of the continue mode the program can use the information to prevent any malfunctions of the PLC or mechanical system Error descriptions detected by the self diagnostics are shown in the next page REMARK 1 As to the LED indication message the order of priority of the LED indication can be changed if CPU module is in the operation mo
55. OFF module and voltage between COM terminals OV Supply voltage value ON Confirm that the input signal is OFF with the peripheral device in monitor mode Input signal OFF y Check the external wiring and external input equipment Check the wiring of the load power and recover the power Check the load wiring and load and recover y Describe the problem to the nearest service center retail store or corporate office and obtain advice Change the output relay number to set the current when the maximum load turn ON simultaneously within specification For problems when the input signal does not turn off and load does not turn off perform troubleshooting by referring to the fault examples for the I O module in Section 11 4 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written The flow when the program and other data cannot be written to the CPU is described Program cannot be written to the programmable controller CPU Is the RUN STOP keyswitch set to STOP RUN STOP Set the RUN STOP keyswitch to STOP Can the program YES be written NO Replace the programmable controller CPU NO YES Can the program ON Is the memory protect switch OFF OFF be written Switch OFF the memory protect M PRO OFF
56. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Number of occupied Current int int C ti Product Name Model Name Description poe poin 3 SRS Remark I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A A1S52B 2 I O modules can be insta A1S52B S1 The power supply module cannot be A1S55B i installed Power is supplied from the 5 I O modules can be insta A1S55B S1 A1S58B main base unit Extension b es 8 I O modules can be insta unit A1S58B S1 A1S65B 5 I O modules can be insta A1S65B S1 The power supply module is A1S68B required 8 I O modules can be insta A1S68B S1 For extension A1SC01B 55mm 2 17inch long flat cable towards right A1SC03B 330mm 13inch long A1SCO7B 700mm 27 56inch long Connection cable A1SC12B 1200mm 47 24inch long for the extension base unit Extension A1SC30B 3000mm 118 11 inch long cable A1SC60B 6000mm 236 22inch long A1SCO5NB 450mm 17 72inch long Cable for the AON ADA extension base A1SCO7NB 700mm 27 56inch long A1SC30NB 3000mm 118 11inch long i unit A1SC50NB 5000mm 196 86inch long 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELSE A Product Name Memory cassette Battery Model Name A2SNMCA 30KE Description With 30k step E2PROM direct connection IC RAM memory backup Applicable model Direct writing to and reading from a peripheral device is feasibl
57. T C set value occupy 4k bytes The microcomputer program area is dedicated to the SFC One network module occupies up to 4k bytes Expanded comment 64 points Number of extension comments 64 1 k bytes File register Comment 1k point 64 points Number of file register points x 2k bytes Number of comments 64 1 k bytes Not usable When the expanded comment capacity is set the system occupies 1k byte When the comment capacity is set the system occupies 1k byte 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 1 The capacity for network parameters of MELSECNET 10 changes depending on the contents set The area for the network parameters shall be secured in 2k byte units based on the total of capacity for each setting The memory capacity of each network parameter is as follows Memory capacity bytes Internal data 30 Routing parameter 390 Transfer parameter between data links 246 Control station 2164 module Common parameter Remote master 2722 bytes station Refresh parameter 92 module Station inherent parameter 1490 module The network parameter capacity for MELSECNET 10 is determined from the total of the memory capacities calculated from above Capacity of the network parameter Total of the capacity setting i 30 to 2048 bytes 2k bytes 2049 to 4096 bytes 4k bytes 4097 to 6144 bytes 6k bytes 6145 to 8192 bytes 8k bytes
58. TEET E E E add beceatlal E ins lietadidadl E A E 4 45 4 5 1 Parts names of the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 AZASCPU S30 urian p aaa i nied a ai ed adele Way edd edn 4 45 4 5 2 Settings for memory protect SWItCH eee eee ceeee eee eeee eee eeeaaeee eee taeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeneeeeereea 4 47 4 5 3 Latch clear operation cccccecccceccecee a aa Aa a a aa a aa eaan 4 48 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1to5 5 Dail POPECIHICATONS 3 ieee dete tetas eesl ee diet clade EE NE E A E S 5 1 5 1 1 Power supply module Selection c cccecccccececeeeeeeeeeceeeaaeceeeeeeeeeeesececccueaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesenaaees 5 3 52 P rt Names zsirt aana Erea auaa eh cat EAA E e a a aea l aAa cease baa detente 5 4 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1to6 10 6T Specifications mret tigna eiere raa rie adar aa aat aaea iiaa deaeaveanacat a viaaa ata ieia 6 1 6 1 1 Base ntspecificatinS eseese a eaaa a aaea a araa ae A ra aoaaa iN 6 1 6 1 2 Extension cable specifications ccccccseccccceceeeeeeeeeeecenecaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecacccaeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneenaaees 6 2 6 1 3 Applicable standards of extension base units A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B AOP ADIB Jn ura e ASAREE REA RE RE ORAE A ARARSA 6 3 6 2 Part Naimes aisn iiin ude uien erae aap dadaa aiaa aaiae aa a eave aaiae aaa Lane 6 7 6 3 Installation and Removal of DIN Rail 0 eecceceeeeceeee eee enne eee ee eater e
59. The programmable controller is open equipment and must be installed within a control panel for use This not only ensures safety but also ensues effective shielding of programmable controller generated electromagnetic noise Also each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel However the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel 1 Control panel a Use a conductive control panel b When attaching the control panel s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the panel and the bolt c To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control panel so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area d Earth the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies e Holes made in the control panel must be 10cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio wave may be emitted f Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquiredenough knowledge of electric facilities can open the control panel 2 Connection of power cable and ground wires Earthing and power supply cable for the programmable controller system must be connected as described below a Provide a grounding point near the power
60. There is an appropriate distance Correct the distance Connector areas of extension cable No loosening at connectors Retighten the connector fixing screw POWER LED Confirm it is ON The LED is ON Faulty if it is OFF Per Section 11 2 2 RUN LED Confirm it is ON in the RUN state The LED is ON Faulty if it is OFF or flickering Section 11 2 3 Per Section 11 2 4 ERROR LED Input LED LEDs on the main module Confirm it is ON at error occurrence Confirm if it correctly turns on and off The LED is OFF ON when error has occurred The LED is ON when input is ON and OFF when input is OFF Faulty other than the above Section 11 2 5 Per Section 11 2 6 Per Section 11 4 1 Output LED Confirm if it correctly turns on and off 10 2 The LED is ON when output is ON and OFF when output is OFF Faulty other than the above Per Section 11 4 2 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION mms SECO A 10 2 Periodic Inspection Inspection on items shown below should be conducted once or twice every six months to a year Conduct the inspection when the equipment is moved or modified or wiring is changed Ambient environment Check item Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Atmosphere Table 10 2 Periodic inspection Content of inspection Measure with temperature and humidity gauge Measure pres
61. after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout Connecting a power supply of a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel The power supply modules may be heated resulting in a fire or failure Press crimp or properly solder the connector for external connection with the specified tool Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire failure or malfunctions Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a distribution terminal block Furthermore the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection For the wiring methods refer to Section 8 7 N CAUTION 1 Wiring power supply a When voltage fluctuations are larger than the specified value connect a constant voltage transformer Constant voltage transformer ___ Program
62. and or ignition WARNING M9006 or M9007 is turned ON when voltage of the battery for backing up programs and power failure compensation function drops Even though programs and contents of power failure compensation function are not erased immediately when these special relays become ON the contents could be erased if the ON status of the special relay fails to be recognized Replace the battery while the total period of power failure is less than shown in Table 10 3 from when the M9006 or M9007 is turned ON Yardstick for battery life and the specifics of replacement are explained below 10 3 1 Battery life The battery life is shown in Table 10 3 Table10 3 Battery life Battery Life Actual Value TYP After Turning ON M9006 or M9007 Power failure Current carrying CPU model name Guaranteed Hour Rate i Ambient Ambient Value Temperature Temperature 40 c 25 C compensation time after alarm occurrence 3600 hr 9400 hr 10800 hr 0 4 years 1 1 years 1 2 years 5140 hr 13400 hr 15400 hr A1SHCPU S1 0 6 years 1 5 years 1 8 years Hardwear version F or later 7200 hr 18800 hr 21600 hr 0 8 years 2 1 years 2 5 years 43800hr 43800hr 43800hr 5 years 5 years 5 years 10 4 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION mms ELS EC A CPU model name A1SHCPU S1 Hardwear version E or earlier A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 Current ca
63. below Pollution level 1 Pollution level 2 Pollution level 3 Pollution level 4 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control panel equivalent to IP54 in a control room or on the floor of a typical factory An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment As shown above the programmable controller can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control panel equivalent to IP54 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 2 5 Module installation 1 9 2 6 Grounding Installing modules contiguously In AnS series programmable controllers the left side of each I O module is left open When installing an I O module to the base do not make any empty slots between any two modules If there is an empty slot on the left side of a module with 100 200VAC rating the circuit board which contains the hazardous voltage circuit becomes bare When it is unavoidable to make an empty slot be sure to install the blank module A1SG60 When using the A1S5LB S1 extension base with no power supply attach the cover packaged with
64. correctly after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout Connecting a power supply of a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel The power supply modules may be heated resulting in a fire or failure Press crimp or properly solder the connector for external connection with the specified tool Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire failure or malfunctions Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a distribution terminal block Furthermore the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection For the wiring methods refer to Section 8 7 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Do not touch any terminal during power distribution Doing so may cause an electric shock Correctly connect the battery
65. devices link devices and data registers than those of the A1SCPU a AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 e I O device X Y 8192 points X YO to X Y1FFF e Link relay B 8192 points BO to B1FFF e Link register W 8192 points WO to W1FFF e Data register D 8192 points DO to D8191 b A2ZASCPU S1 S30 e I O device X Y 8192 points X YO to X Y1FFF e Link relay B 4096 points BO to BFFF e Link register W 4096 points WO to WFFF e Data register D 6144 points DO to D6143 6 Can execute a data communication request batch processing All of the data communication requests from the AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SD51S AD51H S3 peripheral devices and others can be processed by single END processing Normally one END processing responds to one communication request e The data communication request batch processing can be activated by selecting YES on the END Batch Processing Setup in the supplementary function setup of the parameter Also by turning ON the M9029 from the sequence program e Delay of the data transfer to each modules will be prevented by using the data communication request batch processing M9029 When OFF only one request is processed by one scan 1 OVERVIEW mms ELS EC A 7 Can execute the dedicated instructions for the AnA AnUCPU Dedicated instructions for AnA AnUCPU AD57 instructions and PID control instructions can be executed 1 OVERVIEW mms ELS E
66. display ON Partial refresh OFF Sequence interrupt control ON Link interrupt control Switched on to execute the SEG instruction as a partial refresh instruction Switched off to execute the SEG instruction as a 7SEG display instruction Switched on to execute the link refresh enable disable El DI instructions Unusable with An A3H A3M A3V AnA AnU A3V and A3A board Unusable with An A3V and A3N board STEP RUN flag OFF Other than step run ON During step run Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN position Unusable with An AnS AnSH A1FX A2C A0J2H and A52G Status latch complete flag OFF Not complete ON Complete e Turned on when status latch is completed Turned off by reset instruction Unusable with A1 and A1N Main program P set request OFF Other than P set request ON P set request Subprogram 1 P set request Subprogram 2 P set request Subprogram 3 P set request OFF Except during P set request ON During P set request e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete APP 18 Usable with A3 A3N A3H A3M A3V A3A A73 A3U A4U and A3N board Dedicated to A4U APPENDICES mms Si Number Remote t
67. entering install the supplied connector cover or a blank cover A1SG60 to any open connector Module mounting screw hole Screw mounting hole to fix the module to the base Screw size for M4 screw Base installation hole A bell shaped hole used to install the base unit to a control panel For M5 screw Hook for DIN rail Hook for DIN rail installation A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B IMPORTANT Only one extension base unit can be connected to the main base unit Connecting 2 extension base units to the main base unit through 2 extension connectors may cause incorrect input or output 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms Si A 2 Extension base unit A1S52B A1S55B A1S58B A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B 1 A1S65B A1S68B A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S65B A1S68B O O 0 A1S65B S1 m HT w A We 2 A HS 4 We 5 We s We 7 A1S68B A1S52B A1S55B A1S58B A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 I Was Description Extension cable connector A connector used to connect an extension cable by which signals can be transferred to from an main base unit Before connecting the extension cable remove the supplied connector cover Base cover A protecti
68. error code of a faulty remote terminal module when M9060 is turned on The error code storage areas for each remote terminal module are as shown below D9180 Remote terminal module No 1 Remote terminal module numbers from 1 to 14 are set with D9020 to D9034 D9181 Remote terminal module No 2 D9182 Remote terminal module No 3 D9192 Remote terminal module No 13 D9193 Remote terminal module No 14 Ped e Error code is cleared in the following cases e When the RUN key switch is moved from STOP to RUN D9180 to D9183 are all cleared e When Yn4 of each remote terminal is set from OFF to ON APP 42 Usable with A2C and A52G APPENDICES mms SECO Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Number Description Details Limit switch output state Dedicated to torage areas for Stores output state of limit switch function A73 axes 1 and 2 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Li m it switch D9180 JYOFYOE YOD YoCc YoB roa os 1Y08 YO7 Y06 Y05 Y04 Y03 Y02 Y01 Y00 output state le Axis 2 ri Axis 4 1 is stored in Dedicated to storage areas the bit which A73 for anos 3 and 4 Bit pattem of limit ova fafao coresponds to i output Y which switch function output le EF rl Aes bl fs mdna Limit switch state is stored when output state D9182 fy2F y2Ely2plv2clv2B y2aly29 28 27 26 25 241 23 output state
69. is Dedicated to storage areas le ie pla REE turned off A73 for axes 5 and 6 D9183 Y3FIY3E Y3D Y3C Y3B Y3A Y39 Y 38 Y37 Y36 35 Y34 Y33 Limit switch output state ies ms eas Dedicated to storage areas A73 for axes 7 and 8 Stores error codes occurred at the PCPU in BIN code 0 Normal 1 A73CPU hardware error Cause of PCPU PCPU error code 2 PCPU error Dedicated to error 10 A7OAF error A73 11 A7OAF error 12 A7OMDF error 13 AY42 error Servo amplifier connection state is checked and the result is stored in the bit which corresponds to each axis number Connection state is continuously checked Axes which changed from disconnected state to connected state are regarded as connected But axes which changed from connected state to disconnected state are still Dedicated to regarded as connected A73 Bit pattern of servo amplifier connection state Servo amplifier connection data Connected 1 Disconnected 0 APP 43 APPENDICES Manual pulse generator axis setting error Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Manual pulse generator axis setting error code e Stores error code when the manual pulse generator axis setting error flag M9077 is turned on in the bit each corresponds to each axis number 1 is stored in the bit which corresponds to the axis number which caused 1 pulse in
70. is installed to each slot is shown each slot is shown Main base unit A1 38B f 3 4567 Slot No Main base Slot No Extension cable i EN Power supply P e t te o 3 t t P to to to to to to to to U OF 1F 2 3F 4F SF 6F 7F module Ist extension stage UNIT tt 1 210 O42 goo 13 2ndextension stage Extension base unit A1S55B S1 UNIT L 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1 0 om1 alalAl 2 100 110 120 130 1 40 150 160 170 to to to l iso o la to to to to to 10F 11F 12F 13F 14F t5F116F117FI VAS 00 20 40 60 Extension base unit A1S58B S1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 to to to to module Power supply CPU module 1F 3F 5F 7F to to to to to to to to 8F 9F AF BF CF DF EF FF 80 90 AO BO CO DO EO Fo l Extension cable Slot No 1st extension 5 stage r NIT 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 100 120 140 160 180 1A0 3rd extension stage UNIT S dl Extension base unit A1S68B S1 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 to module Power supply TIF 2 3 to to to to to to to 19F 1 AF 1BFi1 CF OF EF 1FFi module 190 1A0 1B0 1C0 1D
71. is is valid for detected A2C e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program For the AnU A2ZUS H and QCPU A A mode Data clear of D9100 to D9107 is executed by turning off M9000 fuse blown For the CPU other than the AnU A2US H and QCPU A A mode Data clear of D9100 to D9107 is executed by turning off D9100 to D9107 fuse blown Stores the output module number of the fuses have blown in the bit pattern b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 ostoo o fo TTT TTT is fi L Indicates the module O s fixed for setting switch 0 Indicates fuse blow Fuse blown module Indicates the module for setting switch 1 Indicates the module Fuse blow Fuse blow module bit for setting switch 2 Dedicated to Indicates the module module pattern for setting Switch 2 AOJ2H Indicates the module for setting switch 4 or the module for extension base unit slot 0 Indicates the module for setting switch 5 or the module for extension base unit slot 1 Indicates the module for setting switch 6 or the module for extension base unit slot 2 Indicates the module for setting switch 7 or the module for extension base unit slot 3 Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and the number of F which turns on when the monitoring timer timed out
72. law to comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives of the EU Directives since 1996 and 1997 respectively The manufacturers must confirm by self declaration that their products meet the requirements of these directives and put the CE mark on the products 1 Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below Name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strasse 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 9 1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC Directives The EMC Directives specifies emission and immunity criteria and requires the products to meet both of them i e not to emit excessive electromagnetic interference emission to be immune to electromagnetic interference outside immunity Guidelines for complying the machinery including MELSEC AnS series programmable controller with the EMC Directives are provided in Section 9 1 1 to Section 9 1 8 below The guidelines are created based on the requirements of the regulations and relevant standards however they do not guarantee that the machinery constructed according to them will not comply with the Directives Therefore the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms E Si 9 1 1 Standard EN61131 2 2007 Standard EN61131 2 2007 EMC Directive related standards 1 Regulations regarding
73. maintenance by detecting the abnormality displaying an error indication halting the operation of the CPU module and so on The CPU module stores the error occurred last to a special register D9008 as an error code and stores further detailed error code to a special register D9091 Even with the power off the latest error information and 15 errors in the past that is 16 errors are stored by battery backup Contents of errors can be checked by the peripheral device For the method of checking the errors in the past refer to Selfdiag nostics of the Operating manual for peripheral device Reset All clear in the past error information can be performed by operating latch clear in the CPU module Contents of the error information are shown below The error which occurred last a The time and date of occurrences of ENO S aiii ai aaan aaa Year month day hour minute second Clock data b Error Code cssncusocissccreiniariers The content of the special register D9008 c Detailed error Code ccceeeeeeees The content of the special register D9091 d Errr Step isinsin oaii The content of the special register D9010 Note that the following three error codes show the contents different from the contents usually shown in detailed error code and in error step when monitoring by the peripheral device 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A PLC Diagnostics PLC Panel Monitor run stop PLC operation status STOP STOP PAUSE
74. of CC Link dedicated instruction OFF Number of remaining instructions executable simultaneously 1 to 10 Number of remaining instructions executable simultaneously 0 Turned ON OFF according to the number of remaining instructions RIRD RIWT RISEND RIRCV being executable simultaneously at one scan OFF Number of remaining instructions executable simultaneously 1 to 10 ON Number of remaining instructions executable simultaneously 0 By assigning M9080 as execution condition the number of instructions above executed simultaneously at one scan can be limited to 10 or less 4 This function is available with the CPU of the fol lowing S W versions or later CPU Type Name Software Version QO2CPU A QO02HCPU A QO6HCPU A A1SJHCPU A1SHCPU A2SHCPU Available with all versions A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU A4UCPU S W version Q Manufactured in July 1999 S W version E AZUSORUSI Manufactured in July 1999 S W version L panera Manufactured in July 1999 APP 21 Can be used only with AnU A2US or AnSH QCPU A A Mode 4 APPENDICES mms Si Number Registration area busy signal for communication request Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Communication request to remote terminal modules enabled Communication request to remote terminal modules disabled Details Indication of comm
75. on the system is The device range shown above can be latched I O assignment 1 Possible to register occupied I O points and module model names A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 2 Number of I O occupied points can be registered The device range other than listed above is the same as that of AZUSCPU S1 Refer to the operation manual of each peripheral device for available functions 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION E ELS EC A 2 3 System Equipment Various components of each module and peripheral devices which can be used by the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU S1 S30 are listed 1 Modules dedicated to AnS Number of occupied Current points points Consumption I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A Product Name Model Name Description Actual number of I O points 1024 memory AZUSHCPU SI capacity 256k bytes Actual number of I O points 512 memory A2USCPU capacity 64k bytes Actual number of I O points 1024 memory A2USCPU S1 capacity 256k bytes Built in RAM memory CPU module Actual number of I O points 512 memory A2ASCPU capacity 64k bytes A2ASCPU S1 ean number of I O points 1024 memory capacity 256k bytes Actual number of I O points 1024 memory A2ASCPU S30 capacity 256k bytes A1S61PN 5VDC 5A 4100 200VAC Installed in the oo nit power supply slot A1S62PN 5VDC A 24VDC 0 6A P of the main base and extension A1S63P 5VDC 5A 24VDC input base P
76. operate normally When the execution condition for the PLF instruction is turned off upon completion of writing the PLF instruction is executed Writing while in operation by the E PROM When the AZ2SNMCA 30KE is installed a When writing a program to the E PROM after the GPP function software package is started up with the PLC s model specified as A3A or A3H cancel the memory protection of both the CPU main module and the memory cassette for the E7PROM A2SNMCA 30KE before execution b The writing of the program cannot be executed from the computer link module or from a peripheral device connected to other stations on the MELSECNET Write the program from a peripheral device connected to the RS 422 of the CPU module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 2 2 Software package Peripheral Device 1 GPP function software packages and model name setting at the start up The table below shows the GPP function software packages allowing you to create the A2USCPU program and PLC model settings at start up When creating a CPU module program set the PLC type A2USH S1 A2US S1 A2AS S1 or A2AS S30 according to the CPU usage modules When A2USH S1 A2AS S30 is not in the PLC type set A3U When A2US S1 A2ZAS S1 is not set A2U When A3U is not set A3A When A2U is not set A2A When A3U A3A A2U or A2A are not set A3H Software package for system Programmable controller CPU model
77. post process to finish one cycle of operation processing of the sequence program and to return the execution of the sequence program to the step 0 a Executes self diagnosis checks such as a fuse blown a module verify and a low battery Refer to Section 4 1 4 b Updates the current value of the timer sets the contact ON OFF updates the current value of the counter and sets the contact to ON Refer to the ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Fundamentals c Executes the data exchange between the programmable controller CPU and a computer link module e g A1SJ71UC24 R2 when there is a data read or write request from the computer link module 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A d Executes the refresh processing when there is a refresh request from the network module or link module e When the trace point setting of sampling trace is by each scan after the execution of END instruction stores the device status for which it is setup into the sampling trace area f By setting link information I O storage device etc of the MELSECNET MINI S3 to the parameters auto refresh processing of the A1SJ71PT32 S3 master module is performed Refer to Section 4 2 6 Power on Initial processing Initialization of 1 O module Initialization of data memory 1 0 address allocation of I O module e Self diagnosis e Set link parameter Refresh processing of I O module Operation processing of the sequence program Ste
78. rotation or for damage prevention such as the upper lower limit setting in positioning any of them must be created outside the programmable controller When the programmable controller detects the following error conditions it stops the operation and turn off all the outputs e The overcurrent protection device or overvoltage protection device of the power supply module is activated e The programmable controller CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error by the self diagnostics function In the case of an error of a part such as an I O control part that cannot be detected by the programmable controller CPU all the outputs may turn on In order to make all machines operate safely in such a case set up a fail safe circuit or a specific mechanism outside the programmable controller Refer to LOADING AND INSTALLATION in this manual for example fail safe circuits Depending on the failure of the output module s relay or transistor the output status may remain ON or OFF incorrectly For output signals that may lead to a serious accident create an external monitoring circuit DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING f load current more than the rating or overcurrent due to a short circuit in the load has flowed in the output module for a long time it may cause a fire and smoke Provide an external safety device such as a fuse Design a circuit so that the external power will be supplied after power up of the programmable
79. scan is performed write the parameters during the first 1 scan Link communication start signal Y n 28 M9038 module RUN 4 CPU MODULE E ELS EC A 1 I O signal Buffer memory from the address of the master master module module Parameter setting items setting ranges and contents of auto refresh as well as the buffer memory address of the master module which is used for exchanging data with the CPU modules are shown below Set the parameters for the number of use of the A1SJ71PT32 S3 AJ71PT32 S3 master modules Number of master modules Setting range 1 to 8 module s Description e Sets the total number of use of the master modules Head I O No Number of I O points of CPU module e Sets the head I O number where the master module is installed Model classification of MINI MINI s3 e MINI or MINI S3 MINI MINI S3 In I O mode occupies 32 points In expansion mode occupies 48 points 110 to 141 Total number of remote I O stations 2 Storage device for received data 0 to 64 station s X M L B T C D W R none Bit device multiples of 16 10 to 41 To the next page Send data storage device Number of retries eY M L B T C D W R none Bit device multiples of 16 0 to 32 times Set only when MINI is set e In MINI S3 since the number of master module s initial ROMs becomes valid
80. setting pe Remark start up A2USH S1 A2US S1 A2AS S30 A2AS S1 SWOIIVD GPPA O is 1 to 3 A3U A3A A2A SWUOIIVD GPPA O is 4 or later A2USH S1 A2AS S30 A2AS S1 GX Developer Writing on the ROM is not allowed SW3GP GPPA SW4GP GPPA SWLOIGP GPPAU SW3GP GPPA Writing on the ROM SW3GP GPPA is not allowed SW4GP GPPA SWLIGP GPPAU 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC A NOTE For A2ZUSHCPU S1 AZASCPU S30 use caution on the followings a Since the PLC s model name for the GPP function software package SWOIVD GPPA O is older than 3 is set to A3U pay attention to the followings 1 When the LED or LEDC instruction is written it is not usable but no error will be issued 2 When the CHG instruction is written it is not usable and the error code 13 and detailed error code 134 will be detected 3 When the subprogram is set it is not usable and the error code 11 and detailed error code 111 will be detected b When the MELSECNET II MELSECNET 10 parameters are used up to the maximum of 16k bytes program capacity will be limited to 22k steps The A2ZUSHCPU S1 uses the same memory area for the sequence program as that for the parameters of MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 Therefore the remainder which is subtracted the memory area used by the MELSECNET II and MELSECNET 10 parameters from the max 30k steps can be used for the sequence program 1 Old softwa
81. station number of remote terminal modules connected to A2C and A52G Setting is not necessarily in the order of station numbers A2CCPUC24 1 to 57 Other CPUs 1 to 61 Data configuration D9021 Remote terminal module No 1 area D9022 Remote terminal module No 2 area Remote terminal module No 13 area Remote terminal module No 14 area Attribute of remote terminal module MINI standard protocol No protocol Sets attribute of each remote terminal module connected to A2C and A52G with 0 or 1 at each bit 0 Conforms to the MINI standard protocol or remote terminal unit 1 No protocol mode of AJ35PTF R2 e Data configuration b15b14b13b12b11b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO D9035 0 10 41 pron 0 1 orn 10 1 0 1J0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 4 Remote terminal No 1 Remote terminal No 2 Remote terminal No 3 Remote terminal No 13 Remote terminal No 14 Applicable CPU Usable with A2C and A52G Extension file register Use block No Stores the block No of the extension file register being used in BCD code Usable with AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode Total number of stations Sets the total number of stations 1 to 64 of I O modules and remote terminal modules which are connected to an A2C or A52G APP 32 Usable with A2C and A52G APPENDICES mms S ECO Number For designation extension file
82. supply a O oO I O equipment Main circuit power supply a O Main circuit equipment On a control panel 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A f Note on using the 24VDC output of the A1S62PN power supply module A CAUTION Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel The power supply modules may be heated resulting in a fire or failure If the 24VDC output capacity is insufficient for one power supply module supply 24VDC from the external 24VDC power supply as shown below 2 3 gei e 2 oO 3 xo Q E Q 24VDC External power supply g 100VAC 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible Connect the modules with a shortest distance Also to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum use thickest wires possible maximum 2mm 0 0031in 2 h Do not bind 100VAC and 24VDC wires together with main circuit high voltage and large current wires or I O signal lines including common line nor place them near each other Provide 100mm 3 94inch clearance between the wires if possible i As measures against surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown below O A i Programmable AC controller I O 1 devices O 9 i v Y E2 i i E1 surge absorber for lightening 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms Si A
83. supply module Earth the power supply s LG and FG terminals LG Line Ground FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18inch or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the programmable controller system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured In addition make sure to wire the ground cable short as the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna b The ground wire led from the grounding point must be twisted with the power cables By twisting with the ground wire noise flowing from the power cables can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power cables the wires and the ground wire may not need to be twisted 9 9 1 3 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms E Si Cables The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise To prevent noise emission use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the I O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance The signal lines including common line of the programmable cont
84. the parameter auto refresh is possible for up to 8 modules When 9 or more modules are desired use the FROM TO instruction in the sequence program from the 9th module Since auto refresh is not possible with send received data for the separate refresh I O modules and for the remote terminal units No 1 to No 14 use them by the FROM TO instructions However the remote terminal units shown below are subject of auto refresh in the limited area AJ35PTF R2 RS 232C interface module AJ35PT OPB M1 S3 mount type tool box AJ35PT OPB P1 S3 portable type tool box 3 For the master modules set up for auto refresh since the CPU module automatically turns ON the link communication start signal Y n 18 or Y n 28 it is not necessary to turn it on from the sequence program 4 Auto refresh of I O data is performed by batch after the CPU module executes the END instruction Auto refresh processing is performed when the CPU module is in the RUN PAUSE STEP RUN status 5 The master module may perform the processing while the link communication start signal Y n 28 is OFF depending on the remote terminal units connected For instance if the AJ35PTF R2 RS 232C interface unit is used without protocol it is necessary to write parameters to the parameter area buffer memory address 860 to 929 while the link communication start signal is OFF Since the link communication start signal becomes ON after the CPU module enters the RUN status and one
85. the specified limit Total of the number of computers shown below is larger than 1344 AD59 x 5 AD57 S1 AD58 x 8 AJ71C24 S3 S6 S8 x 10 AJ7IUC24 x 10 AJ71021 S1 S2 x 29 AJ71PT32 S3 in extension mode x 125 Total gt 1344 1 Five or more network modules Make the total of the installed network have been installed modules and data link modules four or 2 A total of five or more of network less modules and data link modules have been installed 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A E SECO A Error Massage SP UNIT ERROR Checked at execution of the FROM TO instruction or the dedicated instructions for special function modules Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Stop or Continue set by parameter Error and Cause Module specified by the FROM TO instruction is not a special function module Read the error step using a peripheral device and check and correct contents of the FROM TO instruction of the step 1 Module specified by the dedicated instruction for special function module is not a special function module or not a corresponding special function module 2 A command was issued to a CC Link module with function version under B 3 A CC Link dedicated command was issued to a CC Link module for which the netw
86. them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 9inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise When an output module is used to control the lamp load heater solenoid valve etc a large current ten times larger than the normal one may flow at the time that the output status changes from OFF to ON Take some preventive measures such as replacing the output module with the one of a suitable current rating Time from when the CPU module is powered on or is reset to when it enters in RUN status depends on the system configuration parameter settings and program size Design the program so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 1 AC system Power supply Transformer DC power supply established signal Fuse input CPU module Start stop circuit Can be started by turning ON of RA1 which is the programmable controller s RUN output Start switch MC Stop switch RA2 Output for warning lamp or buzzer Turned ON in RUN status by M9039 MC rs Switches the power supply to output devices OFF when the system stops At emergency stops at stops on reaching a limit Interlock circuit Constructs external interlock circuits for opposing operations such as forward and reverse rotation and parts that could cause machine damage or accidents
87. use point setup are automatically set in the serial numbers lt Example gt When the timer use points are set to 512 points and the set value storage device is set to D1000 D equivalent to 256 points D1000 to D1255 in T256 to T511 becomes the devices for the set values using the continuous numbers 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 2 4 O devices A2USHCPU S1 A2ZUSCPU S1 AZASCPU S1 S30 has 8192 I O device points X YO to X Y1FFF each for input X and output Y There are actual I O devices and remote I O devices in this I O range 1 Actual I O device This is the device range where an I O module or special function module can be installed to the main base unit extension base unit and controlled A2USHCPU S1 1024 points X Y0 to X Y3FF A2USCPU __ 512 points X YO to X Y1FF A2USCPU S1 __ 1024 points X Y0 to X Y3FF A2ASCPU et 512 points X YO to X Y1FF A2ASCPU S1 __ 1024 points X Y0 to X Y3FF A2ASCPU S30_ 1024 points X Y0 to X Y3FF 2 Remote I O device The remote I O devices following the actual I O devices or later can be used for the following objectives a Allocate to a remote I O station in the MELSECNET data link system b Allocate to a remote I O station in the MELSECNET 10 network system c Allocate to the reception data storage device or transmission data storage device in the MELSECNET MINI S3 s auto refresh setting d Use as the substitute to an internal rel
88. when M9044 is turned on or off with the peripheral device to start sampling trace STRA or STRAR At scanning 0 At time Time 10 ms unit Stores the value in BIN code for D9044 Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if M9100 is OFF SFC program error code Code number of error occurred in the SFC program Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error 80 SFC program parameter error 81 SFC code error 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error 84 SFC program operation error Error block Block number in which an error occurred Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 33 Usable with A1 and A1N Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Number Error step Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Step number in which an er
89. 0 1E0 1F0 Power supply Extension base unit for A 3rd extension stage ist extension stage Maximum number of I O modules 16 modules Maximum number of I O points Main base unit model name 512 points A1832B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B Extension base unit model name A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S52B S1 A62B A65B A68B A52B A55B A58B A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 Extension cable model name A1SC03B A1SC07B A1SC12B A1SC30B oa A1SCO5NB A1SCO7NB A1SC30NB A1SC50NB A1SC01B right side installation A1SC60B 1 Only one AO N ADA extension base can be used The second extension module cannot be used 2 When the extension base A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A58B S1 or A52B A55B A58B are used the 5VDC power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit Before use refer to Section 6 1 3 and examine if it can be used 3 Limit the length of extension cable to 6m 236inch or shorter 4 When using the extension cable do not tie it with the main circuit cables which has high voltage large current or install them close to each other I O number assignment When I O assignment is not performed 1 Assign I O numbers to the main base unit first then to the extension base unit 2 Assign I O numbers as if both main base unit and extension base unit have 8 slots each When the A1S32B A1S33B A
90. 00 4 wire Temperature input 2 channels 32 special points A1S68TD Thermocouple input 8 channels 32 special points Temperature gcontrol module A1S62TCTT S2 Transistor output thermocouple input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse 32 special points A1S62TCTTBW S2 A1S62TCRT S2 A1S62TCRTBW S2 A1S64TCTT S1 Transistor output thermocouple input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse heater break detection function Transistor output platinum RTD Resistance Temperature Detector input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse Transistor output platinum RTD input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse heater break detection function Transistor output thermocouple input 4 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control 32 special points 32 special points 32 special points 32 special points A1S64TCTTBW S1 Transistor output thermocouple input 4 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control Heater break detection function 32 special points A1S64TCTRT A1S64TCTRTBW Transistor output thermocouple input or platinum RTD input For standard control 4 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control For heating cooling control 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pu Transistor output thermocouple input or platinum RTD input For s
91. 010 cannot be renewed unless M9011 is cleared by user program Step number at which Error step operation error has occurred The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers Unusable with 0 Both input and output in direct mode An A3H and 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode A3M 3 Both input and output in refresh mode I O control I O control mode mode number The operation states of CPU as shown below are stored in D9015 B15 B12 B11 4 B4 B3 X AN N A CPU key switch Remains the same in remote RUN STOP mode RUN PAUSE STEP RUN CPU operating Operating states of Usable with all states CPU types of CPUs STOP PAUSE Status in program Except below 1 STOP _ instruction execution Remote RUN STOP by computer PAUSE When the CPU is in RUN mode and M9040 is off the CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode APP 29 APPENDICES mms Si Number ROM RAM setting Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description ROM RAM E2PROM Details Indicates the setting of memory select chip One value of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN code Applicable CPU Usable with A1 and A1N Program number Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram RAM Indicates which sequence program is run presently One value of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN c
92. 048 points 2048 points 2048 points Timer 2048 points 2048 points 2048 points Counter 1024 points 1024 points 1024 points Index register 14 points 14 points 14 points Comment Max 4032 points Max 4032 points Max 4032 points Expanded comment Max 3968 points Max 3968 points Max 3968 points Watchdog timer setting 200ms fixed 200ms fixed 200ms fixed Data link MELSECNET 10 MELSECNETi II MELSECNET B MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II MELSECNET B MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II MELSECNET B 1 When using A2USCPU S1 2 When using A2ZASCPU S30 3 When using A2ZASCPU S1 or AZASCPU S30 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The possible system configuration with AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 and the precautions when the system is configured and system conponents are described 2 1 Overall Configuration The system configurations of the AZUSHCPU S1 A2ZUSCPU S1 AZASCPU S1 S30 stand alone systems and peripheral devices are shown as follows SR ii To peripheral devices Battery A6BAT A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU S1 S30 a i aeti ij 7 J aes SS SE Memory casette Main base A1S30B Power supply module A1S6LP A2SNM
93. 08 Code States D9091 SP UNIT A special function module is assigned Execute I O assignment again using LAY ERR as an I O module or vice versa in the parameters from the peripheral device I O assignment using parameters from according to the loading status of special the peripheral device function modules There are 9 or more special function Reduce the special function modules except modules except the interrupt module the interrupt module which can execute which can execute interruption to the CPU interrupt start to 8 or less module loaded There are 2 or more data link modules Reduce the data link modules to 1 or less loaded There are 7 or more modules such as Reduce the computer link modules to 6 or a computer link module loaded to one less CPU module There are 2 or more interrupt modules Reduce the interrupt modules to 1 or less loaded Modules assigned by parameters for Perform again module assignment for MNT MINI automatic refresh from the MNT MINI automatic refresh with peripheral device do not conform with parameters according to actually linked the types of station modules actually station modules linked The number of modules of I O Reduce the number of loaded special assignment registration number of function modules loaded modules per one CPU module for the special function modules which can use dedicated instructions is larger than
94. 1S35B for 2 3 5 slots are used as the main base unit add 6 5 3 slots 96 points 80 points 48 points and assign the extension base unit I O numbers 3 16 points are assigned to an empty slot 4 When an extension base for AO N or ALA is used be sure to set to a single extension level If it is set to the number of skipped stages 16 points slot are assigned to all of skipped stages x 8 slots and thus it does not work 5 Items 2 to 3 can be changed by the I O assignment Refer to the ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Fundamentals 3 SPECIFICATIONS mms Si 3 SPECIFICATIONS The general specification common to various modules is shown Item Specifications Operating ambient 0 to 55 C temperature Storage ambient 20 to 75 C temperature Operating ambient sa 10 to 90 RH No condensing humidity Storage ambient ax 10 to 90 RH No condensing humidity Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count Under 5 to 9 Hz Somm 10 times each intermittent 0 138in in X Y Z Conforming to Vibration resistance 4 JIS B 3502 vibration 9 to 150 Hz directions IEC 61131 2 1 7 mm Under 5 to 9 Hz continuous 0 069in vibration 9 to 150 Hz 4 9m s2 Shock resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147m s2 3 times in each of 3 directions XYZ Operation ambiance No corrosive gasses Operating elevation 2000m 6562ft or l
95. 2 Error code list for the ANUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board 11 12 11 4 Fault Examples with I O Modules 0 cccccccceeceeeeeeeccnececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaanaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeennsineeeeeeeess 11 23 11 4 1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective Actions cccecceceeeeeeteeeeeceeaeeeeeeeeees 11 23 11 4 2 Faults in the output circuit 2 22 cece ce cece eee ceeeeeeee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeceaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesicaeeaeeeeeeeteas 11 25 APPENDICES Appendix 1 to Appendix 71 Appendix 1 Instruction S T r e Daae a eee ee cece aaa a r ap a a a a aa ara E a anA App 1 Appendix 1 1 Precautions for write during RUN of a dedicated instruction 8 App 14 Appendix 2 LISTS OF SPECIAL RELAYS AND SPECIAL REGISTERS eseeeeeereeees App 15 Appendix 2 1 List of Special Relay S e eaa aa a ea e aaa App 15 Appendix 2 2 Special Registers 4 ei mna Gages fae ee tian ined ee tener App 27 Appendix 3 Peripheral Device cececeececececceeee cece eee e eee aeaeeaeceeeeeeeeeesesedqaeaecaeeeseeeeseeeseeeaees App 46 Appendix 4 Precautions for Utilizing the Existing Sequence Programs for AAUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 or AZASCPU S1 S30 00 2c cc cee eeeeeecceccceeceee eee ee tee eeceaaeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees App 51 Appendix 4 1 Instructions with different SpecificationSs cccececeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeestneeaeeeeeees App 52 Appendix 4 2 Special rela
96. 24 to C255 possible depending on setting Expansion counter C256 to C1023 Count value set by word device D W R The range and number of points for use set by parameters Refer to Section 4 2 1 Data register D 8192 points DO to D8191 Link register W 8192 points WO to W1FFF Annunciator F File register R 2048 points FO to F2047 8192 points RO to R8191 Fault finding device Points set by parameters Accumulator A Index register V Z Pointer P Interrupt pointer I 2 points AO A1 14 points V V1 to V6 Z Z1 to Z6 256 points PO to P255 32 points 10 to 131 Special relay M 256 points M9000 to M9255 Special register D 256 points D9000 to D9255 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A Comment Performance specifications Continued Model A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 Max 4032 points Set by the unit of 64 points Expanded comment Max 3968 points Set with the unit of 64 points Remark Set in parameters Switch output mode from STOP to RUN Select either re output the operation status before stopping default or output after exectution of operation Set in parameters Self diagnosis function Watchdog error supervision watchdog timer fixed to 200ms Error detection in the memory CPU I O battery etc Refer to Section 4 1 4 for details Operating mode when there is an error Select STO
97. 24VDC transistor output module 16 output 0 5A sink type points A1SY50 16 point 24VDC transistor output module 16 output A1SY60 2A sink type points 16 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 16 output A1SY60E 2A source type points 8 point 5 12 24 48VDC A1SY68A transistor output module 2A sink source type All points independent 16 ou points 32 point 5 12VDC transistor output module 32 ou A1SY71 0 016A sink type points 16 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 16 ou A1SY80 0 8A source type points 32 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 32 ou A1SY81 0 1A source type points 64 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 64 ou A1SY82 0 1A source type points 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ems ELS EC A Number of occupied Current int int C ti Product Name Model Name Description poe poin 3 RD Remark I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A 32 point 12 24VDC input module A1SH42 32 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 0 1A sink type 32 output points 32 point 24VDC input module A1SH42 S1 32 point 12 24VDC transistor output module I O combined 0 1A sink type module 32 ou points 8 point 24VDC input module 16 ou A1SX48Y18 8 point relay contact output module 2A points 8 point 24VDC input module A1SX48Y58 8 point 12 24VDC transistor output module 0 5A 16 ou points Specified nu
98. 2USH board Detailed Error error CPU Error Massage Code Error and Cause Corrective Action D9008 Code States D9091 INSTRCT Instruction codes which the CPU 1 Read the error step using a CODE ERR cannot decode are included in the peripheral device and correct the Checked when program program of the step STOP RUN 2 Check the ROM if it contains or at execution instruction codes which cannot be of instruction decoded If it does replace it with a correct ROM Index qualification is specified for a 32 Read the error step using a peripheral bit constant device and correct the program of the Device specified by a dedicated step instruction is not correct An dedicated instruction has incorrect program structure An dedicated instruction has incorrect command name Index qualification using Z or V is included in the program between LEDA IX and LEDAIIXEND 1 Index qualification is specified for the device numbers and set values in the OUT instruction of timers and counters 2 Index qualification is specified at the label number of the pointer P provided to the head of destination of the CJ SCJ CALL CALLP JMP LEDA B FCALL and LEDAVB BREAK instructions or at the label number of the interrupt pointer 1 provided to the head of an interrupt program Errors other than 101 to 107 mentioned above
99. 4 15 CPU module Vcpu Vo V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 Ve V7 Va Vo V10 V11 V12 V13 Via Vis IcPu lo l l2 l3 l4 l5 le I7 ls lo lio M1 2 l13 l14 l15 Vcpu Vo to V7 Voltage drop at each slot of the main base unit Icpu lo to I7 Current consumption at each slot of the main base unit Vs to V15 Voltage drop at each slot of the extension base unit ls to l15 Current consumption at each slot of the extension base unit a Calculation of voltage drops with the main base unit A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B Resistive value with the main base unit is 0 007 Q per slot Sum up the voltage drops of each slot 1 Voltage drop at the CPU module Vcpu Vcpu 0 007x Icpu lo l1 l2 l3 l4 15 le 17 ls I9 lio h11 112 143 14 115 2 Voltage drop at slot 0 Vo Vo 0 007x lo l1 l2 13 l4 I5 le I7 ls lo lo 144 12 113 114 115 3 Voltage drop at slot 1 V1 Vi 0 007x l1 l2 13 l4 I5 le I7 ls 19 l10 l11 112 113 114 115 4 Voltage drop at slot 2 V2 V2 0 007x l2 l3 l4 I5 le I7 ls lo l1o 141 12 113 l14 115 5 Voltage drop at slot 3 V3 V3 0 007x l3 l4 I5 le I7 l8 lo Ho M44 112 113 114 115 6 Voltage drop at slot 4 V4 V4 0 007x l4 I5 le 17 I8 l9 Ito 1114 h12 M13 114 115 7 Voltage drop at slot 5 V5 Vs 0 007x I5 le I7 l8 lo lio M11
100. 4 7 4 1 2 Operation processing of RUN STOP PAUSE and STEP RUN 2 cseeceeeeeeeeeeees 4 10 4 1 3 Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeteees 4 12 LTA Self diagnosticsS FUuMCthons eteti coectessacy coecuetd lees bed EEE cevdbad AEE A EES AE EN AEA 4 13 41 9 SDOVICS MSE nnsa ese oad ye Saas beatae ta dad exacts odna det ina ats dees are sae ua Dade es aAa a aa ar dees 4 17 4 2 Parameter Setting RANGES cccccccececedeneeeeccdeceeceeccceeenseceeseneesecedanensecedeeeeseeecedseensecedeeteneeeeetenes 4 19 4 2 1 List of parameter setting range eee eeteee ee eeete eter rete eee eet aaeee eee taeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 4 19 4 2 2 Memory capacity setting for main program file register comment etc eee 4 22 4 2 3 Setting ranges of timer and COUNTED eee eee eet ee ee eeee treet eaters ee eaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeiaeeeeeseaaas 4 33 424 WMOMICVICES ei ear na ae trav Sau 2c aa TRE EEA abana ate gacg aa APO gba as ea E aAa aan 4 35 4 2 5 I O assignment of special function MOCUIES ececeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeseaaas 4 36 4 2 6 MELSECNET MINI S3 auto refresh processing cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeenneeeeeeaees 4 37 ALS UMCHOM LISt EEOSE cyst tere esd esate ci ai nies na aac enti eae eet Send A eet ee 4 42 fA Handing PreGautlons sc 22 ise tedieeaien steed eaves heharaa sil ietlie TEE 4 44 AS Part Names
101. 55B A58B are used the 5VDC power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit Before use refer to Section 6 1 3 and examine if it can be used 3 Limit the length of extension cable to 6m 236inch or shorter 4 When using the extension cable do not tie it with the main circuit cables which has high voltage large current or install them close to each other 1 Assign I O numbers to the main base unit first then to the extension base unit 2 Assign I O numbers as if both main base unit and extension base unit have 8 slots each When the A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B for 2 3 5 slots are used as the main base unit add 6 5 3 slots 96 points 80 points 48 points and assign the extension base unit I O numbers 3 16 points are assigned to an empty slot 4 When an extension base for AO N or ALA is used be sure to set to a single extension level If it is set to the number of skipped stages 16 points slot are assigned to all of skipped stages x 8 slots and thus it does not work 5 Items 2 to 3 can be changed by the I O assignment Refer to the ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Fundamentals 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A System configuration Maximum number of extension stages b A2USCPU A2ASCPU system When the AnS dedicated extension base is used An example when the 32 point module is installed to When the AO N AO A extension base is used An example when the 32 point module
102. 7 cannot be used CO to C255 can be used Counter C CO to C1023 can be used C256 to C1023 cannot be used DO to D6143 can be used DO to D1023 can be used Data register D 9 D D6144 to D8191 cannot be used D1024 to D8191 cannot be used WO to WFFF can be used WO to W3FF can be used Link register W i wy W1000 to W1FFF cannot be used W400 to W1FFF cannot be used FO to F255 can be used Annunciator F FO to F2047 can be used F256 to F2047 cannot be used V and Z can be used Index register V Z V V1 to V6 Z Z1 to Z6 can be used V1 to V6 Z1 to Z6 cannot be used Expanded comment Max 3968 points Unusable Used on the system Latch power failure compensatio ony oe lon The device range shown above can be latched The device range shown above can be latched range Possible to register occupied I O Number of I O occupied points can I O assignment points and module model names be registered 1 The device range other than listed above is the same as that of A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 2 Refer to the operation manual of each peripheral device for available functions 2 10 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A b For the A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Instruction sequence basic application dedicated AnACPU compatible module A3HCPU compatible module Modules whose PLC model for system FD start up is A2A Modules wh
103. 8 digit d BCD BIN conversion instructions 16 bit BIN BCD 32 bit 16 bit BCD gt BIN 32 bit e Data transfer instructions 16 bit Transfer 32 bit 16 bit Exchange 32 bit 16 bit Negation transfer 32 bit Batch transfer 16 bit Same data batch transfer 16 bit f Program branch instructions Subroutine call Interrupt program enable disable App 3 CJ SCJ JMP CALL CALLP EI DI IRET Two types each for B B P Two types each for DB DB P Two types each for B B P Two types each for DB DB P B B P DB DB P B B P DB DB P BCD BCDP DBCD DBCDP BIN BINP DBIN DBINP MOV MOVP DMOV DMOVP XCH XCHP DXCH DXCHP CML CMLP DCML DCMLP BMOV BMOVP FMOV FMOVP RET APPENDICES mms Si g Refresh instructions Link refresh enable disable El DI EG 3 Application instructions a Logical operation instructions 16 bit Logical product 32 bit 16 bit Logical sum 32 bit 16 bit Exclusive logical sum 32 bit 16 bit Not exclusive logical sum 32 bit Complements of 2 ae 16 bit sign highlights b Rotation instructions Right rotation Left rotation c Shift instructions 16 bit Right shift Device unit 16 bit Left shift Device unit App 4 Two types each for WAND WANDP DAND DANDP Two types each for WOR WORP DOR DORP Two types each for WXOR WXORP
104. AC DC main power I O power AC I O unshielded 2kV DC I O analog communication 1kV EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity A EN61000 4 6 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields a Immunity test in which lightning surge is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which high frequency noise is applied to the power line and signal line AC power line AC I O power AC I O unshielded 2kV CM 1kV DM DC power line DC I O power 0 5kV CM DM DC I O AC I O shielded analog communication 1kV CM 0 15M 80MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz 10Vrms EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic field immunity 1 EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips and interruption immunity 1 Immunity test in which the product is installed in inductive magnetic field Immunity test in which power supply voltage is momentarily interrupted 50Hz 60Hz 30A m Apply at 0 0 5 cycles and zero cross point 0 250 300 cycles 50 60Hz 40 10 12 cycles 50 60Hz 70 25 30 cycles 50 60Hz Programmable controllers are open type devices devices designed to be housed inside other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel 9 2 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC directive
105. BO to YBF in the above system lt Example fail safe circuits gt On delay timer Internal program YBOO T1 7 s Off delay timer 3 M9032 J YBO Cy I T2 Js External load YB1O L to to YBO YBFO L bt be gt 24V O 0 5s 0 5s ovo F 4 24VDC CPU module Output module 2 T1 T2 aao oYo we 2 Since YBO turns ON and OFF alternatively at 0 5 second intervals use a contactless output module a transistor is used in the above example 3 Ifan off delay timer especially miniature timer is not available construct the failsafe circuit using an on delay timer shown on the next page 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A When constructing a fail safe circuit using on delay timers only On delay timer Internal program YBO M9032 2 lt Bo u M1 AS Mow 1s M1 ee ee ee eee M2 T2 QAQ 0 5s 0 5s Externai load MC YB10 _ _ L s to to YBFO L 24VO b OV 2 24VDC CPU module output module T M2 4 Use a solid state relay for the M1 relay 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 8 2 Installation Environment Avoid the following environment when you install the programmable controller system 1 A location in which the ambient temperature falls outside the range of 0 to 55 C 2 A location in which the ambi
106. C A 1 2 A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 Performance Specification Comparisons The differences in the performance and specifications between A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 are as follows A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 performances specifications are the same but the following items I O control mode A2USHCPU S1 Refresh mode A2USCPU S1 Refresh mode A2ASCPU S1 S30 Refresh mode Processing speed Sequence instruction 0 09uUs step 0 2us step 0 2uUs step Constant scan 10 to 190ms 10 to 190ms 10 to 190ms Main program capacity Max 30k steps Max 14k steps Max 14k steps Max 30k steps 2 Memory capacity Memo y built in RAM capacity and 256k bytes 64k bytes 256k bytes 64k bytes 256k bytes memory 2 E PROM type memory cassette cassette model Number of I O device points A2SNMCA 30KE 8192 points A2SNMCA 30KE 8192 points A2SNMCA 30KE 8192 points Number of I O points 1024 points 512 points 1024 points 512 points 1024 points Internal relay 8192 points 8192 points 8192 points Link relay 8192 points 8192 points 4096 points Link register 8192 points 8192 points 4096 points Data register 8192 points 8192 points 6144 points File register 8192 points 8192 points 8192 points Device points Annunciator 2
107. C and AOJ2H Clock data error OFF No error ON Error Switched on by clock data D9025 to D9028 error and switched off without an error Unusable with An A3H A3M A3V A2C and AOJ2H Clock data display OFF No processing ON Display Clock data such as month day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU front LED display Usable with A3N A3A A3U A4U A73 and A3N board Clock data read request OFF No processing ON Read request Reads clock data to D9025 D9028 in BCD when M9028 is on Unusable with An A3H A3M A3V A2C and AOJ2H Data communication request batch process OFF No batch process ON Batch process Turn M9029 on in the sequence program to process all data communication requests which have been received in the entire scan during END process of the scan The data communication request batch process can be turned on or off during operation OFF in default state Each data communication request is processed at the END process in the order of reception APP 16 Usable with AnU and A2US H APPENDICES Number 0 1 second clock Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description 0 05 seconds 0 05 seconds 0 2 second clock 0 1 seconds 0 1 seconds 1 second clock 0 5 seconds 0 5 seconds 2 second clock 1 second 1 second 1 minute clock 30 seconds 30 secon
108. C input sink Leakage current Input module 11 23 Connect an appropriate resistance so that voltage between the terminal of the input module and the common is lower than the OFF voltage as shown below DC input sink Input module Resister ok An example of calculation of resistance to be connected is provided on the following page 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si Table 11 2 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions Continued Situation Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies DC input Countermeasure e Use only one power supply Connect a diode to prevent the sneak path figure below DC input Input signal does not turn OFF E1 Input module Input module lt Sample calculation for Example 4 gt When a switch with LED indicator giving leaking current of 3mA at maximum when 24VDC power is supplied to the A1SX40 A1SX40 l 2 Leakage current 3mA Input module I ard j a 24VDC 1 1mA or less OFF current of the A1SX40 is not satisfied Hence connect a resistor as shown below rr 3mA A1SX40 l s m i i Iz 1mA all IR 2mA R oe P G 24VDC 2 Calculate the resistance value R as shown below To satisfy 1mA or less OFF current of the A1SX40 connect a resistor which flows 2mA or more IR Iz Z Input impedance R Iz R lt x Z Input impedance x 3 3
109. C program registered Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned off if it is not Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A526 SFC program start stop OFF SFC program stop ON SFC program start Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program is to be started If turned off operation output of the execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A526 SFC program starting status OFF Initial start ON Continuous start Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using M9101 ON Started with the step of the block being executed when the program stopped OFF All execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started with the initial step of block 0 Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turning on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 23 Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Num
110. CA 30KE with E7PROM ee KF F Extension cable A1SC DOB Input module A1SXO0 O _ Eee N alga Sboooobase Extension base Output module A1SYOD A1S50B S1 without a power A1S6LB with a power supply module i Special function module Connection cable A1SCO5NB For building block type f m m Input module AX O10 1 Fuse a 100000000 Ha N 2 0 ooco000000 a lt Loa Loa Extension base A50B without a power supply module A60B with a power supply module Power suppy module A60P Special function module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A To CPU module AC30R4 AC300R4 cable A6PHP Plasma hand held graphic programmer Printer gt A7NPR S1 K6PR K general purpose printer AC30R2 cable A6GPP intelligent GPP gt A7PUS programming unit ___ AC30R4 PUS gt m cable programming unit AC20R4 A8PU cable IBM PC AT compatible personal computer RS 232C lt gt RS 422 converter When using an IBM PC AT compatible personal A6DU B computer refer to the system configuration section
111. CPU module I O module and special function module etc to from the base unit are explained Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten the module fixing screw within the specified torque When no screw is tightened even if the module is installed correctly it may cause malfunctions a failure or a drop of the module If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Filure to do so may damage the module Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module N CAUTION Module installation screw Base unit Module 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 1 Module installation Installation procedure of the module is explained Base unit Ze c Module Module connector Insert the module fixing projection of the module into the module fixing hole Install the module to the base unit by pushing it in the direction of the arrow Projection for fixing the module Confirm that the module is firmly inserted to the base unit then fix it with the module fixed screw Complete 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 Removal of the module Removal procedure of the modul
112. Device range of ASUCPU A2US MELSEC MEDOC Usable Device range of A3ACPU A2US Usable Device range of AAACPU A2U displayed at the start up Device range of ASHCPU A2U displayed at the start up Software version E or later Software version D or earlier Usable Not usable App 47 Device range of AAACPU APPENDICES ems ELS EC A d For A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Model name of PLC model name Applicable range the peripheral Model name of the software package Applicability device A6GPP A6PHP SW4GP GPPA Usable at start up Device range of AAACPU SW3GP GPPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier Not usable SW3 HGPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier SWOIX GPPAE Not usable Usable Device range of AAACPU SWOIVD GPPA Usable Device range of A2UCPU A2US MELSEC MEDOC Usable Device range of AAACPU A2US Usable Device range of AAACPU A2U displayed at the start up Device range of ASHCPU A2U displayed at the start up Software version E or later Software version D or earlier Usable Not usable Device range of AAACPU 2 The compatibility of the conventional products existing system products and the new products AnU compatible products is listed in the following table a For A2USHCPU S1 Product used to wr
113. ENDICES MELSEC A Appendix5 4 3 A1S52B extension base unit 4 mounting screws W525 Wi a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ESEEY4 16 4 155 6 10 28 0 64 Appendix5 4 4 A1S55B extension base unit Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws Mo Wi MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ee Saal Unit mm inch App 63 APPENDICES MELSEC A Appendix5 4 5 A1S58B extension base unit 4 mounting screws Meo Mia MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION a gt 345 13 58 16 4 365 14 37 28 0 64 Unit mm inch Appendix5 4 6 A1S65B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws AN 110 14 33 130 15 12 16 4 0 65 E 315 12 40 i i T 28 1 10 Unit mm inch App 64 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix5 4 7 A1S68B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5x25 130 5 12 E 16 4 0 65 28 1 10 A a o Unit mm inch Appendix5 4 8 A1S52B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5x25 o M MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION BEZE 16 4 0 65 155 6 10 28 1 10 Unit mm inch App 65 APPENDICES MELSEC A Appendix5 4 9 A1S55B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5x25 DA 110 4 33 130 5 12 roa 16 4 0 65 mo 260 i my 28 1 10 Appendix5 4 10A1S58B S1 extension base unit Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws 28 1 10 16 4 0 65 Unit
114. Engage the upper side groove on the base unit with the upper part of the DIN rail 2 Press the base unit to the DIN rail to fix them Base unit b Removing the unit from the DIN rail The base unit is removed from the DIN rail as follows 1 Pull out the projection on the bottom of the base unit with the flat head screwdriver 6 x 100 2 With the projection pulled out pull the base unit to remove it from the DIN rail Base unit Pull the unit in this direction Screwdriver Projection 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY mms SECO A 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY 7 1 Memory Cassette This section explains the specifications of the memory cassette the handling precautions and the installation and removal procedures 7 1 1 Specifications The specifications of the memory cassette are shown in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Specifications of the memory cassette Item A2SNMCA 30KE Memory specification E2PROM Memory capacity 64k bytes Max 30k steps Maximum number of writes 100 000 times for E2PROM External dimensions 15mm 0 59inch x 69 6mm 2 74inch x 40 5mm 1 59inch 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY mms Si 7 1 2 Handling precautions This section explains the specifications of the memory cassette the handling precautions and the installation and removal procedures 1 2 Since the memory cassette and pin connector are made of resin do not drop them or a
115. I O module and the modules below Use noise filters whose damping characteristic is equivalent to that of the MA1206 produced by TDK Lambda Corporation e Analog digital converter module e Digital analog converter module e Analog I O module Temperature input module e Temperature control module e Pulse input module e High speed counter module e Positioning module 9 1 8 Installation environment of the CC Link LT module and the AS i module 1 CC Link LT module Use the module under the environment of Zone A For the categories of the following products refer to the manual came with each product e CL1Y4 R1B1 e CL1Y4 R1B2 e CL1XY4 DR1B2 e CL1XY8 DR1B2 e CL1PSU 2A 2 AS i module Use the module under the environment of Zone A 1 Zone defines categories according to industrial environment specified in the EMC and Low Voltage Directives EN61131 2 Zone C Factory mains isolated from public mains by dedicated transformer Zone B Dedicated power distribution secondary surge protection rated voltage 300V or less Zone A Local power distribution protected from dedicated power distribution by AC DC converter and insulation transformer rated voltage 120V or less 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives The Low Voltage Directives apply to the electrical equipment operating from 50 to 1000VAC or 75 to 1500VDC the manufacturer mus
116. I S3 Simplification of sequence program Performs I O auto refresh communication with send received data area for the batch refresh of AJ71PT32 S3 A1SJ71PT32 S3 up to 8 modules Auto refresh is executed in a batch after END processing The FROM TO instruction for I O in the sequence program becomes unnecessary Programming is possible with I O devices allocated directly by each module Performed by setting the auto refresh parameter of a peripheral device Refer to Section 4 2 6 Remote RUN STOP control from outside the When performing RUN STOP L programmable controller When a programmable controller CPU is in RUN the RUN STOP key switch is set to RUN performs the programmable controller s STOP RUN from outside the programmable controller external input peripheral devices computer with a remote control When performed with the external input X the parameter is set with a peripheral device When performed by a peripheral device perform in the programmable controller test operation When performed via the computer link module perform using the dedicated commands PAUSE When stopping operation of CPU while retaining the output Y When performing RUN PAUSE control from outside the programmable controller Stops the operation processing of programmable controller CPU while retaining the ON OFF of all the outputs Y When the operation is stopped by STOP all the outputs
117. J71PT32 S3 master module Q AJ35TB1 16D Station 5 number of stations occupied 2 stations N AA Head I O number 40 Model classification MINI MINI S3 MINI 5 i Total number of x remote I O stations 11 stations 88331473R AX40Y50C number of stations occupied 1 station Station 7 number of stations occupied 4 stations Sample parameter setting of the GPP function software package for the above system configuration is shown below Number of modules 1 0 8 Error number Error Retain The storage devices for the send received data for the present system example are as follows a Storage device for received data Master module A2USHCPU S1 Address b15 b8b7 110 Station 2 Station 1 111 Station 4 Station 3 112 Station 6 Station 5 113 Station 8 Station 7 114 Station 10 Station 9 115 Station 11 X458 X457 N Input area Used by the system 1 Set the device number X400 for bO of the station 1 as a received data storage device 2 The received data storage device occupies from X400 to X45F For the present system example since the total number of stations is odd it is occupied for one extra station 4 40 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 3 The device numbers of input modules connected are as follows Stations 1 to 4 AX41C gt X400 to X41F Stations 5 to 6 AJ35TB 16D X420 to
118. M 4 2 4 5 Interrupt pointer I eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 I O assignment of special function modules 4 36 I O control MOE eee eecceeeceeeeeeeeeeaee snes 4 1 4 4 V O device S si iins iii nin 4 35 L Latch clear operation eseeeeeeeeeees 4 48 Latch relay L an 4 2 4 5 Latch power failure compensation range sadddanenadadeslvandagdandandad cea E 4 3 4 6 LED Name of the LED cc ceeeeceeeeee ee eee 4 46 5 4 ERROR LED is flickering 2 06 11 7 ERROR LED is turned ON 05 11 6 POWER LED is turned OFF 05 11 3 RUN LED is flickering eeeee 11 5 RUN LED is turned OFF eee 11 4 Link register W nennen 4 2 4 5 Link relay B e niiina 4 2 4 5 LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 1 9 12 M Maximum number of extension 06 2 30 Maximum number of extension stages 2 29 MELSECNET MINI S3 auto refresh processing ainda sista dxwnwanadetetawnst decane dba Cedewcaueaddunnins E 4 37 Memory capacity cccceeeeeee 4 1 4 4 4 22 Memory cassette Installation and removal of memory cassette 7 3 Memory cassette handling precautions 7 2 Specifications of the memory cassette 7 1 Microcomputer program 000ceee App 56 Module Installation eiiiai ni inanan iaa 8 12 REMOVA l 0 0 02 2 ccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenena
119. MITSUBISHI Type AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU S 1 830 User s Manual Mitsubishi Programmable Controller SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels AN WARNING and AN CAUTION WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage all Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under AN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Create a safety circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure the whole system will operate safely even if an external power failure or a programmable controller failure occurs Otherwise incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident 1 For an emergency stop circuit protection circuit and interlock circuit that is designed for incompatible actions such as forward reverse
120. Number of occupied points points I O allocation module type 32 special points Current Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Remark When bus connected A953GOT A951GOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors TFT color 320 x 240 dots Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors TFT color 320 x 240 dots 32 special points For RS 232C connected only When bus connected A950GOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors TFT color 320 x 240 dots For RS 422 connected only GT1565 VTBA Large size graphic operation terminal 8 4 256 65536 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots When installing a multi color display board 65536 colors can be displayed GT1575 VTBA Large size graphic operation terminal 10 4 256 65536 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots When installing a multi color display board 65536 colors can be displayed 32 special points When bus connected Main Base Unit A1S32B 2 I O modules can be installed A1S33B 3 I O modules can be installed A1S35B A1S38B 5 I O modules can be installed 8 I O modules can be installed Extension connector on the right and left side each 2
121. P or continue Set in parameters refer to Section 4 2 1 RUN time startup method Initial start upon power supply on power restoration after power failure automatic restart by turning the RUN switch of the CPU or ON Latch power failure compensation range L1000 to L2047 default Possible to set latch ranges for L B T C D W Range set by parameters Remote RUN PAUSE contacts Possible to set one contact point for each of RUN PAUSE from X0 to X1FFF Set in parameters Print title regisration YES 128 characters Set in parameters Keyword registration YES Set in parameters I O assignment Possible to register number of occupied I O points and module model names Step operation Interrupt processing Possible to execute or stop sequence program operations Possible to operate an interrupt program by the interrupt module or constant period interrupt signal Refer to Section 4 3 Data link Clock function MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II B Year month day hour minute second day of the week automatic detection of the leap year 3 2 to 5 1s TYP 1 6s d at 0 C 1 2 to 5 38 TYP 2 2s d at 25 C 8 2 to 3 5s TYP 1 6s d at 55 C Accuracy Allowable momentary power failure period By power supply module Refer to Section 5 1 5VDC internal current consumption 0 32A Weight 0 46kg 0 41kg External dimensions
122. PC power and load the memory cassette RAM ERROR Checked at power on The sequence program storage RAM in the CPU module caused an error The work area RAM in the CPU module caused an error The device memory in the CPU module caused an error The address RAM in the CPU module caused an error Since this is CPU hardware error consult Mitsubishi representative OPE CIRCUIT ERROR Checked at power on OPE CIRCUIT ERR Checked at execution of the END instruction The operation circuit for index qualification in the CPU does not work correctly Hardware logic in the CPU does not operate correctly The operation circuit for sequential processing in the CPU does not operate correctly In the END processing check the operation circuit for index qualification in the CPU does not work correctly In the END processing check the hardware in the CPU does not operate correctly Since this is CPU hardware error consult Mitsubishi representative WDT ERROR Checked at execution of END processing Scan time is longer than the WDT time 1 Scan time of the user s program has been extended due to certain conditions 2 Scan time has been extended due to momentary power failure occurred during scanning 1 Calculate and check the scan time of user program and reduce the scan time using the CJ instruction or the like 2 Monit
123. PVRD2 App 9 APPENDICES mms l Si m AJ71024 S8 computer link module control instructions Character up to OOH code Data send Intended number of characters Data receive Communication status read SPBUSY Communication processing forced interruption n AJ71021 S1 terminal interface module control instructions Data output to RS 232C data up to 00H code PR2 Data output to RS 422 data up to 00H code PR4 Data output to RS 232C for number of intended points PRN2 Data output to RS 422 for number of intended PRN4 points Data read input from RS 232C INPUT2 Data input from RS 422 INPUT4 Data read from RAM GET Data write to RAM PUT Communication status read SPBUSY Communication processing forced interruption SPCLR 0 MELSECNET MINI S3 master module control instructions Key input from operation box INPUT Data send receive for specified number of bytes to from AJ35PTF R2 PR PRN INPUT Data read write for MINI standard protocol module MINI Error reset for remote terminal module MINIERR Communication status read SPBUSY Communication status forced interruption SPCLR App 10 APPENDICES mms l S ECO p PID operation instructions Control data setting PID operation PID operation result monitoring for AD57 S1 PIDINIT PIDCONT PID57 q AD59 S1 memory card centronix interface module control instructions Charact
124. Refer to Section 4 2 1 Data register D Link register W 6144 points DO to D6143 4096 points WO to WFFF Annunciator F File register R 2048 points FO to F2047 8192 points RO to R8191 Fault finding device Points set by parameters Accumulator A Index register V Z 2 points AO A1 14 points V V1 to V6 Z Z1 to Z6 Pointer P 256 points PO to P255 Interrupt pointer I 32 points 0 to 131 Special relay M 256 points M9000 to M9255 Special register D 256 points D9000 to D9255 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A Comment Performance specifications Continued Model A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 Max 4032 points Set with the unit of 64 points Expanded comment Max 3968 points Set with the unit of 64 points Remark Set in parameters Switch output mode from STOP to RUN Select either re output the operation status before stopping default or output after exectution of operation Set in parameters Self diagnosis function Watchdog error supervision watchdog timer fixed to 200ms Error detection in the memory CPU I O battery etc Refer to Section 4 1 4 for details Operating mode when there is an error Select STOP or continue Set in parameters refer to Section 4 2 1 RUN time start up method Initial start upon power supply on power restoration after power failure
125. Register for a data link The range not set by the link parameters can be used as a substitute for a data register File register RO to R8191 8192 points For expanding the data register User memory area is used for this Accumulator AO A1 2 points Data register used to store a operation result of basic and application instructions Index register Nesting V V1 to V6 Z Z1 to Z6 14 points NO to N7 8 levels Used for qualification of devices X Y M L B F T C D W R K H P Indicates nesting structure of a master control Pointer PO to P255 256 points Indicates destination of the branch instructions CJ SCJ CALL JMP Interrupt pointer 10 to 131 32 points When an interruption factor is generated it indicates the destination of the interrupt program corresponding to the interruption factor Decimal constant K 32768 to K32767 16 bit instruction K 2147483648 to K2147483647 32 bit instruction Used to set timer counter pointer number interrupt pointer number bit device digits and values for basic and application instructions Hexadecimal HO to HFFFF 16 bit instruction HO to HFFFFFFFF 32 bit instruction REMARK Used to the set values for basic and application instructions The step relay in the list above can be used in the same manner as the internal relay M For the program creation with two kinds of functions in one pr
126. Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after every END 1 second counter Counts 1 every second When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second e It starts counting up from 0 to 32767 then down to 32768 and then again up to 0 Counting repeats this routine APP 30 Usable with AnA A2AS Anu AnA board and QCPU A A Mode APPENDICES mms S ECO Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Number Description Details Applicable CPU Stores the year 2 lower digits and month in BCD Clock data ee es ee B3 Example Clock data Year month Unusable with Clock data An A3H A3M Clock data HHHHHHHHE A3V A2C and Day hour re Glock AOJ2H Hour H3110 Stores the Minute and second in BCD B15 BO Clock data r Example Clock data E poo 35 minutes apaa ge 48 seconds Minute Second H3548 Stores the day of the week in BCD B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 Minute second Day ihe Nek Unusable with Sunday An A3H A3M Monday A3V A2C and Tuesday A0J2H Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Clock data Clock data day of the week 0 must be set oa ale r lo APP 31 APPENDICES mms S ECO Number Remote terminal parameter setting Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Details e Sets the head
127. Special Relay Related Special Resister D9100 to D9107 D9116 to D9123 APP 26 APPENDICES mms S ECO Appendix 2 2 Special Registers Special registers are data registers of which applications have been determined inside the PC Therefore do not write data to the special registers in the program except the ones with numbers marked 2 in the table Table App2 2 Special Register List Description Details Applicable CPU e When fuse blown modules are detected the lowest number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal To monitor Fuse blow module the number by peripheral devices perform monitor number operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of D9100 to D9107 are reset to 0 Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations Unusable with A0J2H Only remote I O station information is valid for A2C Fuse blow Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred I O Module for AOJ2 Extension Base Unit Setting Base Unit Switch Stored Data Slot No Stored Data 0 0 Dedicated to A0J2H 1 Fica blew Fuse blow module 3 3 number 5 6 7 8 7 8 In case of remote I O station module I O number 10H 1 is stored If an I O module wh
128. T EXECUTE I CPU error RAM check Operation circuit check e When switching ON or resetting e When M9084 is ON during STOP When switching ON or resetting e When switching ON or resetting Watchdog error supervision e Upon execution of END instruction END instruction not executed Upon execution of END instruction Main CPU check Always Flickering RAM ERROR OPE CIRCUIT ERR WDT ERROR END NOT EXECUTE MAIN CPU DOWN I O error Module verification error 1 Default stop Fuse blown 1 Default stop Upon execution of END instruction However not checked when M9084 is ON Upon execution of END instruction However not checked when M9084 is ON Stop Operate Flickering ON UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF Special function module error Control bus check Special function module error Link module error Upon execution of FROM TO instruction Upon execution of FROM TO instruction e When switching ON or resetting e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN I O interrupt error When interruption occurs Special function module allocation error e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP RUN Flickering CONTROL BUS ERR SP UNIT DOWN LINK UNIT ERROR 1 0 INT ERROR SP UNIT LAY ERR Special module access error 1 Default stop Upon execution of FROM TO instruction Stop Operate Flic
129. T I O LINK master module A1SJ51T64 MELSECNET I O LINK master station Controls I O LINK remote I O module of a maximum of 64 stations and a total of 128 I O points If only a few remote I O units are used perform I O assignment with a peripheral device to decrease the number of occupied I O points to 16 32 or 48 64 output points S LINK interface module A1SJ71SL92N Master module for S LINK I O total 128 points 32 special points AS I interface module A1SJ71AS92 Master module for AS I I O total 496 points 32 special points Positioning detection module A1S62LS Absolute positioning detection module 32 special points Programmable controller easier monitoring module A1SS91 Programmable controller easier monitoring module 16 ou points Memory card interface module A1SD59J S2 Memory card interface module 32 special points The current con sumption describes in connecting A1SD59J MIF Simulation module A6SIM X64Y64 An I O simulation unit used connected to the base unit Debugging can be executed without connecting the I O module to the base unit Use an expansion cable of the AnS series between the main base of the AnS series and the A6SIM X64Y64 64 input points 64 output points TYP 0 3 When all points ON 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ems ELS EC A Number of occupied Current int int C ti Pr
130. USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 and AZASCPU S1 S30 execute the pulse output used in the direct method by the SET RST instruction in the A1SHCPU or A2SHCPU create the program as follows For direct method of the A1SHCPU and For A2USHCPU A2SHCPU 1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 XO a When the ACPU common instructions are used b When the dedicated instructions for the AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 or AZASCPU S1 S30 are used When a special function module such as the AD61 S1 high speed counter module is used use the above program if outputting the pulse signals to the module is required App 55 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix4 5 Microcomputer program Since the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 do not have the microcomputer mode the utility software packages and user created microcomputer programs used for the A1SHCPU and A2SHCPU are not available The microcomputer program area for A2 USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 is dedicated for the SFC When the utility software packages or the microcomputer programs above are used delete all of the SUB instructions microcomputer program call used for executing them from the sequence program When the following utility packages are used modify the program using the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 dedicated instructions 1 SWO AD57P neiiniihuaniiseiiaianads AnACPU AnUCPU Programming Manual Usable for creating the canvas and AD57 IB
131. X42F Stations 7 to8 AX40Y50C X430 to X43F With respect to X440 to X45F they are simultaneously refreshed and set to OFF at any time Do not use X440 to X45F in the sequence program b Send data storage device Address b15 b8 b7 bO 10 Station 2 Station 1 x4oF to x4os x4o7 to x400 11 Station 4 Station 3 X41F to x418 x417 to _ x410 12 Station 6 Station 5 x42F to x428 x427 to x420 13 Station 8 Station 7 X43F to x438 x437 to x430 14 Station 10 Station 9 lt lt if X44F to X448 X447 to X440 15 Station 11 l xasF to xase x457 to x450 ENEA Output area Used by the system 1 Set the device number Y400 for bO of the station 1 as a send data storage device 2 The send data storage device occupies from Y400 to Y45F For the present system example since the total number of stations is odd it is occupied for one extra station 3 The device numbers of output modules connected are as follows Stations 9 to 10 AX40Y50C Y440 to Y44F Station 11 AJ35TJ 8R Y450 to Y457 With respect to Y400 to Y43F and Y458 to Y44F they are simultaneously refreshed but are not output 1 Set the send and received data storage devices so that device numbers are not overlapped When the received data storage device is set to BO in the system configuration example it occupies BO to B5F as the device range Set the send data storage device to B60 or later
132. Y are set to OFF When programmable controller CPU is in RUN the RUN STOP key switch is set to RUN performs the programmable controller s STOP RUN from outside the programmable controller CPU external input peripheral devices computer with a remote control Performed by the peripheral device in the programmable controller test operation When performed with the external input X perform the parameter setting with the peripheral device set the special relay M9040 to ON with the sequence program then perform Status latch Carries out operation check and failure factor check on each device when debugging or a failure condition is met To the next page With respect to the devices to which status latches are set up when the status latch conditions are met the data contents of the devices are stored in the extension file register for the status latch area in the CPU main module the data stored are cleared by the latch clear operation The criteria for the satisfied condition can be selected from when the SLT instruction is executed by the sequence program or when the device value matches the set condition Using the peripheral devices set the device to which the status latch is performed and the extension file register where the data will be stored e Using the peripheral devices monitor the status latch data 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A Continued Function application Samp
133. able Device range of A3ACPU Device range of ASHCPU A2USH displayed at the start up A2USH displayed at the startup Model name of the peripheral device A6GPP A6PHP Software version E or later Usable Device range of A3ACPU Software version D or earlier b For A2ZUSCPU S1 Model name of the software package SW4GP GPPA Not usable Applicability Usable Applicable range Device range of AAACPU PLC model name at start up SW3GP GPPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier Not usable SW3 HGPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier Not usable Usable Device range of AAACPU displayed at the start up Usable Device range of ASHCPU A2U displayed at the start up Software version E or later Device range of AAACPU Software version D or earlier Not usable App 46 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Model name of the peripheral device A6GPP A6PHP c For A2ASCPU S30 Model name of the software package SW4GP GPPA Applicability Usable Applicable range Device range of A2ACPU PLC model name at start up SW3GP GPPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier Not usable SW3 HGPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier SWOIX GPPAE Not usable Usable Device range of A3ACPU SWOIVD GPPA Usable
134. able controllers is the sum total of the parameters T C setting values program capacities file registers comment points sampling traces and status latches The memory capacities are unchanged The extension memories cannot be approved For the calculation method of memory capacity refer to Section 4 2 2 2 I O devices of the actual number of I O points or later can be used as the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II B MELSECNET MINI or CC Link 4 CPU MODULE E ELS EC A K2 2 O Q co 2 gt D Q Internal relay M Performance specifications Continued Model A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 7144 points MO to M999 M2048 to M8191 Latch relay L Total 8192 shared by M L S 1048 points L1000 to L2047 Step relay S 0 point None for the initial status The range can be changed by parameters Link relay B 8192 points BO to B1FFF Timer T 2048 points Default 256 points 100ms timer TO to T199 Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7s 10ms timer T200 to T255 Setting time 0 01 to 327 67s 100ms retentive timer none for initial Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7s Expansion timer T256 to T2047 Time set by word device D W R The range and number of points for use set by parameters Refer to Section 4 2 1 Counter C 1024 points Default 256 points Normal counter CO to C255 Setting range 1 to 32767 times Interrupt counter none for default C2
135. able for parameter range When setting the capacity exceeded the empty area the total capacity is allocated from block No 10 in order in the extension file register An area block that is stored area in the expanded comment cannot be used as an extension file register 3 Sampling trace data and status latch data are stored to the area of the extension file register The stored block Nos are specified at GX Developer Parameter 4 A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU S30 AZASCPU S1 144k 4k a b c d e f 16k n A2USCPU A2ASCPU _ 64k 4k a b c d e f 16k n 4 30 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A REMARK When performing RAM operation as following parameter setting calculation examples for addresses stored various data are shown A parameter 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A M Amoy Head address for storing capacity Parameter T C set value 4k bytes Sequence program 30k bytes Main program Microcomputer program Ok byte MELSECNET 10 network parameter 2k bytes Not used area 12k Block No 8 16k bytes Block No 7 16k bytes Block No 6 16k bytes Extension file Block No 9 16k bytes Because the empty memory capacity is 12k register Block No 4 16k bytes bytes extension file registers can be only used 1 block Block No 3 16k bytes Block No 2 16k bytes Block No 1 16k bytes File register aj Comment Block No 16 16k bytes Extension file Bl
136. ainst surge due to lightning separate the AC wiring and DC wiring and connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in i of item 1 Failure to do so increases the risk of I O equipment failure due to lightning 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 3 Grounding Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground connector N caution S C Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions a Carry out the independent grounding if possible b Ifthe independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding 2 as Programmable shown below S Lp Programma N Y controller controller Other device i r aN Programmable Other device Other device controller 1 Independent grounding Best 2 Shared grounding Good 3 Common grounding Not allowed c Use the cable of 2mm 0 0031in or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the programmable controller to make the grounding cable short as possible d If a malfunction occurs due to grounding separate either LG or FG of the base unit the device combination or all the connection from the grounding 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms E Si 8 7 2 Wiring to module terminals This section explains the wiring of power cables and ground wires to the main and extension bases Main base unit A1S38B Main base unit A1S38B
137. al APP 34 Can be used only with AnU A2US or AnSH 5 Usable with A2C and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Number Abnormal base module Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Stores the bit pattern of the abnormal base module Details Stores the bit pattern of the base module in abnormal condition When basic base module is abnormal Bit 0 turns ON When 1st expansion base module is abnormal Bit 1 turns ON When 2nd expansion base module is abnormal Bit 2 turns ON When 7th expansion base module is abnormal Bit 7 turns ON Applicable CPU Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode PC communication check Data check by AJ71C024 e In the loopback test mode of individual AJ71C24 the AJ71C24 automatically executes data write read and communication check Usable with all types of CPUs Clock data Clock data year month Two digits showing the year XX of 19XX and month are stored to D9073 in BCD codes as shown below B15 B12 B11 B8 B7 B4 B3 B0 Example 1987 July tort hod ae Year Month Clock data Clock data day time Two digits showing the day and time are stored to D9074 in BCD codes as shown below B8 B7 B15 B12 B11 B4 B3 Example 31th 10 o clock H3110 ARE E E EEEE EE EEA E ERA a Day Time Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Clock data Clock data minute second T
138. and obtain advice Complete 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 6 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is flickering The flow when the ERROR LED turns ON during operation is described The ERROR LED is flickering Is the details of the special register D9124 0 If o Describe the problem to the nearest service center retail store or corporate office and obtain advice If not 0 Reset the annunciator coil that is ON using the RST FLiinstruction Complete 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 7 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON The corrective action when the output load of the output module does not turn ON during operation is described The output load does not turn ON Is the output module s operation display ON NO YES Is the voltage of the load power supply included NO YES What is the voltage of between each output COM terminal of the output odule OV The supplied voltage value is output Output module error Replace the output module Confirm the rush current when the maximum load NG turn ON simultaneously Check the output status with the peripheral device in monitor mode Measure the input to the Is the operation display of the input module ON
139. and test the main program with peripheral device RS 422 connector oan a e Cover it with a lid when no peripheral device is to be connected e Protective cover for printed circuit board of CPU module memory cassette RS 422 connector battery etc e Open the cover to perform the following operations Installation and removal of the memory cassette Setting DIP switches Connecting the battery to the connector Battery replacement Module mounting Used to fix a module to the base unit screws Batt e For the retention of data for program latch range devices and file registers for atter y installation and removal of battery refer to Section 7 2 Di itch e The switch to set whether memory protect is enabled or not when built in RAM is ip switc E used Refer to Section 4 5 2 for details of the setting Battery connector e For the connection with the connector on the battery side Memory cassette e Connector to install a memory cassette It automatically enters into ROM operation installing connector when a memory cassette is installed Hardware version Hardware version seal of CPU module Software version Software version seal of CPU module 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 4 5 2 Settings for memory protect switch Memory write protect switch is for prevent a program from overwriting and deletion by an operation of the peripheral device It is used to prevent overwriting an
140. ange are limited Details are provided in Section 2 2 3 4 CPU MODULE mms l SECO A 4 1 1 Overview of operation processing An overview of processing when starting power supply for the CPU module to execution of the sequence program is explained CPU modules processing may be categorized roughly into the following four kinds 1 Initial processing This is a preprocess to execute sequence operations and is performed only once upon power on or reset a Resets the I O module and initialize it b Initializes the range of data memory for which latch is not set up sets the bit device to OFF and the word device to 0 c Allocates I O address of the I O module automatically based on the I O module number or the position of installation on the extension base unit d Execute the self diagnostics check for the parameter setting and the operation circuit Refer to Section 4 1 4 e For the control station of the MELSECNET 10 or the master station of MELSECNET II B sets the network link parameter information to the network data link module and commences the network communication data link Refresh processing of I O module Executes the refresh processing of I O module Refer to the ACPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual Fundamentals Operation processing of a sequence program Executes the sequence program from step 0 to the END instruction written in the programmable controller CPU END processing This is a
141. aped holes for M5 screws Terminal screw size M4 x6 FG terminal Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal 0 75 to 2mm V 1 25 4 V 1 25 YS4 V 2 YS4A Applicable tightening torque98 to 137N cm External dimensions 315mm 12 40inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 420mm 16 54inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 155mm 6 10inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 260mm 10 24inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 365mm 14 37inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch Weight 0 71kg 0 95kg 0 38kg 0 61kg 0 87kg Accessory Installation screws M5 x25 4 pcs 4 a Dustproof cover for I O module 1 pc Installation screws M5 x 25 4 pcs 1 For the attachment of the dustproof cover refer to Section 8 6 For the usage of the base units which do not require power supply module A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 and A1S58B S1 refer to the power supply module selection in Section 5 1 1 and the applicable standards of extension base units in Section 6 1 3 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms E S 6 1 2 Extension cable specifications The specifications of the extension cables applicable to PLC systems are shown in Table 6 3 Table 6 3 Extension cable specifications A1SC01B A1SC03B A1SCO7B A1SC12B A1SC30B A1SC60B A1SCOSNB A1SCO7NB A1SC30NB A1SC50NB 0 055m 0 33m T 2m 6 0m 0 45m 5 0m 0 18
142. aster module for B NET 32 special points 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION eee ELS EC A Product Name MELSECNET 10 data link module Model Name A1SJ71LP21 Description For the control master and normal stations of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the dual loop Sl type optical fiber cable Number of occupied points points I O allocation module type 32 special points Current Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Remark A1SJ71LP21GE For the control master and normal stations of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the dual loop Gl type optical fiber cable 32 special points A1SJ71BR11 For the control master and normal stations of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the single bus coaxial cable 32 special points A1SJ71LR21 For the control master and normal stations of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the coaxial cable dual loop 32 special points CC Link system master module MELSECNET MINI S3 master module A1SJ61BT11 A1SJ71PT32 S3 For the master and local stations of the CC Link data link system For the twisted pair shield cable only For MELSECNET MINI S3 master stations max 64 stations Performs remote I O and remote terminal control of a total of 512 I O points 32 special points I O dedicated mode 32 32 special points Expanded mode 48 48 special points MELSECNE
143. ate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers Note This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes App 70 APPENDICES mms S ECO Appendix7 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the follwoing when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products 1 Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown on the previous page on the batteries devices or their packaging 2 Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation
144. automatic restart by turning the RUN switch of the CPU or ON Latch power failure compensation range L1000 to L2047 default Possible to set latch ranges for L B T C D W Range set by parameters Remote RUN PAUSE contacts Possible to set one contact point for each of RUN PAUSE from X0 to X1FFF Set in parameters Print title regisration YES 128 characters Set in parameters Keyword registration YES Set in parameters I O assignment Possible to register number of occupied I O points and module model names Step operation Interrupt processing Possible to execute or stop sequence program operations Possible to operate an interrupt program by the interrupt module or constant period interruput signal Refer to Section 4 3 Data link Clock function MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II B Year month day hour minute second day of the week automatic detection of the leap year 3 2 to 5 1s TYP 1 6s d at 0 C 1 2 to 5 38 TYP 2 2s d at 25 C 8 2 to 3 5s TYP 1 6s d at 55 C Accuracy Allowable momentary power failure period By power supply module Refer to Section 5 1 5VDC internal current consumption 0 32A Weight 0 41kg External dimensions 130mm 5 12inch x 54 5mm 2 15inch x 93 6mm 3 69inch CAUTION When the conventional system software packages and peripheral devices are used the usable device r
145. ay Substitute only for output device 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 2 5 O assignment of special function modules By registering the model name of the following special function modules upon the I O assignment from the peripheral devices the dedicated instructions for special function modules can be used Model name of special function module AD61 Setting for model name registration AD61 AD61 S1 AD61S1 AD59 AD59 S1 AD59 AD59S1 AJ71C24 AJ71C24 AJ71C24 S3 AJ71C24S3 AJ71C24 S6 AJ71C24S6 AJ71C24 S8 AJ71C24S8 AJ71UC24 AJ71UC24 AJ71C21 AJ71C21 AJ71C21 S1 AJ71C21S1 AJ71PT32 S3 PT32S3 AD57 AD57 AD57 S1 AD57S1 AD58 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF AD58 A1SJ71UC24 A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1SPT32S3 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 4 2 6 MELSECNET MINI S3 auto refresh processing By setting link information I O storage device etc of the MELSECNET MINI S3 to the parameters the module automatically communicates with the buffer memory area for the batch refresh send received data of the A1SJ71PT32 S3 AJ71PT32 S3 master module abbreviated as the master module hereafter Sequence programs can be created using the I O devices allocated to send received by the auto refresh setting The FROM TO instructions are not required 1 Since up to 8 master modules can be set for auto refresh by
146. ays that have specific applications in the sequencer Therefore do not turn the special register ON OFF on the program Except for the ones marked by 1 or 2 in the table Fuse blown Table App2 1 Special Relay List Description OFF Normal ON Fuse blown unit Details e Turned on when there is one or more output units of which fuse has been blown or external power supply has been turned off only for small type Remains on if normal status is restored Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition Applicable CPU Usable with all types of CPUs Only remote I O station information is valid for A2C I O unit verify error OFF Normal ON Error Turned on if the status of I O module is different from entered status when power is turned on Remains on if normal status is restored I O module verification is done also to remote I O station modules Reset is enabled only when special registers D9116 to D9123 are reset Usable with all types of CPUs Only remote I O station information is valid for A2C MINI link master module error OFF Normal ON Error Turned on when the MINI S3 link error is detected on even one of the MINI S3 link modules being loaded Remains on if normal status is restored Dedicated to AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode AC DOWN detection OFF AC power good ON AC power DOWN Turned on when an momentary power failure of 20 m
147. been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi pro
148. below Indicates the location of ceiling of we the panel wiring duct or other part Extension base 30mm 1 18inch or more O Main base o 30mm 1 18inch or more Figure8 1 Parallel installation s This shows the position of the panel s ceiling wiring duct or se components Duct Height of 50mm 1 97inch Main base 430mm 1 18inch or more Main base A Tench or more o O fe A F O fo i 30mm t 30mm 1 18inch or more APT ch or more L f 30mm 1 18inch or more 80mm o 3 15inch or more Extension base unit A1S5 OB S1 A1S6 OB S1 Duct Height of 50mm 1 97inch or less 30mm 1 18inch or more Extension base unit 80mm LSS SLAP SAAS S Panel 3 15inch or more ASCIB S1 A1SOB S1 LBA SLA LFS AS Figure8 2 Series installation etc Programmable controller Door Contactor relay etc lt P 100mm 3 94 inch or more Figure8 3 Distance between the front face of the programmable co Figure8 5 Horizontal installation not allowed Figure8 4 Vertical installation ntroller and other devices not allowed 8 10 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 8 5 Installation and Removal of the Base Units How to install and remove the power supply module
149. ber Consecutive step transfer enable disable Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Consecutive step transfer disable ON Consecutive step transfer enable Details Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of which transfer conditions are established when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are established ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred Applicable CPU Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H Ans AnSH A1FX and A52G Consecutive transfer prevention flag OFF Transfer complete ON Transfer incomplete e Turned on when consecutive transfer is not executed with consecutive transfer enabled Turned off when transfer of one step is completed Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104 Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C AOJ2H Ans AnSH A1FX and A52G Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9108 Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9109 Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9110 Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9111 Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9112 Step transfer monitoring timer start corresponds to D9113 e Step transfer monitoring timer start corr
150. ble e Display status of each display indicator POWER LED RUN LED ERROR LED I O LED etc f Status of each setting switch extension base power failure compensation etc After confirming a to f connect a peripheral device and observe the operation status of the programmable controller and program contents 2 Error confirmation Observe how the error changes by performing the following operations a Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP b Reset using the RUN STOP key switch c Turn ON OFF the power supply 3 Narrow down the range By performing the 1 and 2 above assume the faulty area in the following a Programmable controller or external b I O module or others c Sequence program 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 Troubleshooting The error definition determination method error definition corresponding to the error code and corrective actions are described 11 2 1 Troubleshooting procedure The error definitions are described by events Error occurrence details To Flow for actions when the POWER There WER TED Sore LED is turned OFF in Section 11 2 2 To Flow for actions when the RUN The RUN LED is OFF LED is turned OFF in Section 11 2 3 To Flow for actions when the RUN The RUN LED is flickering LED is flickering in Section 11 2 4 To Flow for actions when the ERROR The ERROR LED is ON LED is t
151. ble Vc Vc Resistive value of the extension cable x Iz Resistive value of extension cable A1SCO1B 0 022 A1SC60B 0 1822 A1SCO3B 0 021Q2 A1SCOSNB 0 037Q A1SCO07B 0 036Q2 A1SCO7NB 0 0452 A1SC12B 0 055Q A1SC30NB 0 12Q A1SC30B 0 1212 A1SC50NB 0 18Q d Verification of the receiving port voltage 5 1 V Vk Vz Vc 2 4 75 V 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 4 MELSEC A Calculation examples A1S38B Kp ropP oi clo ce TIL A2USHCPU S1 A1S03B 0 021 A1S58B T slololt oj cic pad Calculation of voltage drop on the main base unit Vk 0 007 x 0 32 0 05x 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 27x8 x9 0 15372 Calculation of voltage drop on the extension base unit Vz 0 006 x 0 27 x 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 05832 Voltage drop on the extension cable Vc 0 021 x 0 27 x 8 0 04536 Verification of the receiving port voltage 5 1 0 15372 0 05832 0 04536 4 8426 V Since the receiving port voltage is more than 4 75V the above system is usable To reduce the voltage drop The following methods are effective to reduce the voltage drop a c Change the installing position of the module Install modules with large current consumption in order from slot 0 of the main base unit Install modules with small current consumption to the extension base unit Connect the base units in series By connecting base units in series connecting the exte
152. capacities are unchanged The extension memories cannot be approved For the calculation method of memory capacity refer to Section 4 2 2 2 VO devices of the actual number of I O points or later can be used as the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II B MELSECNET MINI or CC Link 4 g amp fe a o 2 gt D Q CPU MODULE Internal relay M Performance specifications Continued A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 7144 points MO to M999 M2048 to M8191 A2ASCPU S30 Latch relay L Total 8192 shared by 1048 points L1000 to L2047 MES Step relay S 0 point None for the initial state MELSEC A The range can be changed by parameters Link relay B 4096 points BO to BFFF Timer T Counter C 2048 points Default 256 points 100ms timer TO to T199 Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7s 10ms timer T200 to T255 Setting time 0 01 to 327 67s 100ms retentive timer none for initial Setting time 0 1 to 3276 7s Expansion timer T256 to T2047 Time set by word device D W R 2 1024 points Default 256 points Normal counter CO to C255 Setting range 1 to 32767 times gt Interrupt counter none for default C224 to C255 possible depending on setting Expansion counter C256 to C1023 Count value set by word device D W R The range and number of points for use set by parameters Refer to Section 4 2 1 The range and number of points for use set by parameters
153. cations are used Basically the instructions which are not listed in this section do not require modifications 1 CHK instruction Modifications are required when the A1SHCPU or A2SHCPU is used in the refresh mode Output reverse instruction X005 K4 X005 e Yo00 M1 gt LEDB FF LEDC Y010 LEDR oy aa i vo OM 2 DIEI instruction Modifications are required when the special relay M9053 is ON e When M9053 has been turned ON the Enable Disable setting of the link refresh instruction El DI are excutable e As the AZUSHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 and AZASCPU S1 S30 perform the link refresh in the END processing enabling or disabling the link refresh during the sequence program execution is not allowed Therefore modify the sequence program 3 LEDA LEDB instruction X001 X001 LEDA ABCDEFGH o gt ASC ABCDEFGH DO LEDB IJKLMNOP ASC IJKLMNOP D1 LED DO 4 SUB SUBP instruction Unusable e As the A2USCHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 cannot store the microcomputer program the SUB instruction is inexecutableA2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 e For use in the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 or A2ASCPU S1 S30 all the data processed in the microcomputer program area must be changed into those of the dedicated instrutions App 52 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix4 2 Special relays and special registers with different specifications The A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU S1 S30 do not use the following special rela
154. ccumulation time used by M9077 Setting range 1 to 255ms Default 5ms When the value other than 1 to 255 ms is designated the value in D9077 is reset to 0 Applicable CPU Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Number of executable CC Link dedicated instructions Stores the number of remaining CC Link dedicated instructions being executable Stores the number of remaining instructions RIRD IRIWT RISEND RIRCV being executable simultaneously at one scan With QCUP A or ANUCPU Number of remaining instructions being executable 10 Number of instructions executed simultaneously With AnNSHCPU Number of remaining instructions being executable 64 Number of instructions executed simultaneously 6 This function is available with the CPU of the following S W versions or later CPU Type Name Software Version QO02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A A1SJHCPU A1SHCPU A2SHCPU Available with all versions A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU A4UCPU S W version Q Manufactured in July 1999 S W version E AZU SCEU S1 Manufactured in July 1999 S W version L AZUSHCPUSS Manufactured in July 1999 Can be used only with AnU A2US QCPU A A Mode or AnSH 6 Number of vacant registration areas for communication requests Stores the number of vacant registration areas for communication requests executed to remote terminal modules connected to MINI S3 link module
155. cecececeeecnccceeeeeeeeteeeecacaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesecseccueaeeeeeeeseeeeees 10 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 to 11 28 11 1 Fundamentals of TroubDleshooting cece eeeeeeeeeencneeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeenaeeeeeseeeiaeeeeeseneeeeenines 11 1 14152 TrOUDIGSNOOUNG sx ctitts A EAA a Aea A A A Baetaeie 11 2 11 2 1 Troubleshooting procedure siora aa T T E EEE 11 2 11 2 2 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is turned OFF cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 11 2 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFF ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 4 11 2 4 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is flickering 00 0 2 cee ceeeeeeeeeete eee eetetneeeeeetteeeeeereee 11 5 11 2 5 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ON cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeees 11 6 11 2 6 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is flickering 0 ecceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeetteeeeeetnteeeeeeeaee 11 7 11 2 7 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON ceeeee 11 8 11 2 8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be Written eeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaees 11 9 11 2 9 Flow for actions when the CPU module is not started up c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 11 10 113 Eror Code List ersan aa al toes aed ans a nite 2 ete it a die 11 11 11 3 1 Procedure to read an error code c cccecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeececeaaeceeeeeeeeeeesecsensaesaecaeeeeeeereettess 11 11 11 3
156. ces The range not set by the link parameters can be used as a substitute for a data register For fault detection A fault finding program is created in advance and if it becomes ON during RUN the number is stored in a special register D 100ms timer 10ms timer 100ms retentive timer and later TO to T2047 2048 points Register for storing setting value s is required for T256 Up timing timer There are three kinds 100ms timer 10ms timer and 100ms retentive timers Counter Interrupt counter CO to C1023 1024 points Interrupt counter C224 to C255 fixed Register for storing setting value s is required for C256 and later Up timing There are two kinds up timing counter used in programmable controller programs which counts number of interrupts 4 CPU MODULE Device Data register MELSEC A Device list From the previous page Range of usage points A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2USHCPU S1 A2ZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 DO to D8191 8192 points A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 DO to D6143 6144 points Description of device Memory used to store data inside programmable controller Special register D9000 to D9255 256 points Data memory set in advance for the special use Link register A2USHCPU S1 A2ZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 WO to W1FFF 8192 points A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 WO to WFFF 4096 points
157. ch may affect the programmable controller so care must be taken 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 8 4 Installing the Base Units Precautions concerning installation of the main base unit and extension base unit are described next 8 4 1 Precautions when installing programmable controller Precautions concerning the installation of programmable controller to the panel etc are explained below 1 To improve the ventilation and to facilitate the exchange of the module provide at least 30mm 1 18inch of distance between the top part of the module and any structure or part However when A52B A55B A58B A62B A65B or A68B extension base unit is used provide at least 80mm 3 15inch of distance between the top of the unit and any structural part Do not install vertically or horizontally because of concerns with ventilation If there are any protrusions dents or distortion on the installation surface of the base unit an excessive force is applied to the printed circuit board and causes problems so install to a flat surface Avoid sharing the same panel with any source of vibration such as a large sized magnetic contactor or no fuse breaker and install to a separate panel or away from such devices Provide wiring ducts as necessary However when the clearance of the top and bottom of the programmable controller are smaller than those shown in figure 8 1 pay attention to the following a When insta
158. ch the included dustproof cover to the module in slot 0 Otherwise internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to external I O section N CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise When an output module is used to control the lamp load heater solenoid valve etc a large current ten times larger than the normal one may flow at the time that the output status changes from OFF to ON Take some preventive measures such as replacing the output module with the one of a suitable current rating Time from when the CPU module is powered on or is reset to when it enters in RUN status depends on the system configuration parameter settings and program size Design the program so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC under the environment specified in the user s manual Otherwise it may cause electric shocks fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten the module mounting screw within the specified torque When no screw is tightened even if the m
159. ckage to use the device range for the A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 or AZASCPU S1 S30 Example SW1IVD SAP2Z etc 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 2 3 Precautions when using GPP function software packages and A8PUE peripheral devices which are not compatible with AnU A2AS When starting with GPP function software packages not compatible with the AnU A2USH S1 A2US A2AS S1 A2AS S30 starting with the PLC model name A3A A2A or A3H or a A8PUE peripheral device containing A7PUS the usable device ranges are limited as follows 1 Usable device range a For the A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 AnACPU compatible module A3HCPU compatible module Modules whose PLC model for Modules whose PLC model for system FD start up is A3A system FD start up is A3H Instruction sequence basic application dedicated All instructions can be used Program capacity A maximum of 30k steps can be used for the main program X YO to X Y7FF can be used X YO to X Y7FF can be used Number of I O device points X Y X Y800 to X Y1FFF cannot be used X Y800 to X Y1FFF cannot be used M L SO to M L S2047 can be used M L S relay M L SO to M L S8191 can be used M L S2048 to M L S8191 cannot be used BO to BFFF can be used BO to B3FF can be used Link relay B y B B1000 to B1FFF cannot be used B400 to B1FFF cannot be used TO to T255 can be used Timer T TO to T2047 can be used T256 to T204
160. coaxial cables such as A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71LR21 and A1SJ71BR11 Noise in the range of 30 MHz or higher in radiation noise can be suppressed by the use of double shielded coaxial cables manufactured by MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD 5C 2V CCY Earth the outer shield to the ground Shield Earth this section Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Make sure to attach a ferrite core to the double shielded coaxial cable connected to the MELSECNET module In addition position the ferrite core on each cable near the outlet of the control panel The ferrite core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 is recommended Ethernet module Precautions to be followed when AUI cables twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are used are described below a b Always earth the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below ome Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the 10BASE T connectors For the shielded twisted pair cables strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below Shielded twisted pair cables Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable The ferrit
161. connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst and or ignition Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Failure to do so may result in an electric shock If they are too loose it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions If too tight it may cause damage the screw and or module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions CAUTION When performing online operations especially program modification forced output or operating status change by connecting a peripheral device to the running CPU module read the manual carefully and ensure the safety Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify each of modules Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire When using a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone keep a distance of 25cm 9 84inch or more from the programmable controller in all directions Failure to do so may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module Do not drop or a
162. controller Activating the external power supply prior to the programmable controller may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction For the operation status of each station at a communication error in data link refer to the respective data link manual The communication error may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When controlling a running programmable controller data modification by connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or a PC to a special function module create an interlock circuit on sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time Also before performing any other controls e g program modification operating status change status control read the manual carefully and ensure the safety In these controls especially the one from an external device to a programmable controller in a remote location some programmable controller side problem may not be resolved immediately due to failure of data communications To prevent this create an interlock circuit on sequence programs and establish corrective procedures for communication failure between the external device and the programmable controller CPU When setting up the system do not allow any empty slot on the base unit If any slot is left empty be sure to use a blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 for it When using the extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 atta
163. correct output or malfunctions When controlling a running programmable controller data modification by connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or a PC to a special function module create an interlock circuit on sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time Also before performing any other controls e g program modification operating status change status control read the manual carefully and ensure the safety In these controls especially the one from an external device to a programmable controller in a remote location some programmable controller side problem may not be resolved immediately due to failure of data communications To prevent this create an interlock circuit on sequence programs and establish corrective procedures for communication failure between the external device and the programmable controller CPU When setting up the system do not allow any empty slot on the base unit If any slot is left empty be sure to use a blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 for it When using the extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 attach the included dustproof cover to the module in slot 0 Otherwise internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to external I O section Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring
164. ction explains the specifications handling precautions and installation procedures of the battery 1 Do not short it 2 Do not disassemble it 3 Do not put it in a fire 4 Do not heat it 5 Do not solder to the electrodes 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY mms ELS EC A 7 2 3 Battery installation The battery connector is removed to prevent battery consumption during distribution and storage Connect the lead connector of the battery to the battery connector on the CPU module print broad before using CPU module for the following objectives e Using the sequence program file registers or comments in the user program area in the CPU module e Using the power failure compensation function CPU module Battery connector Firmly push the connector all the way 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECA 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION To increase the system reliability and fully utilize the functions procedures and cautions concerning loading and installation are described below 8 1 Fail Safe Circuit Concept J N WARNING When the programmable controller is powered ON and then OFF improper outputs may be generated temporarily depending on the delay time and start up time differences between the programmable controller power supply and the external power supply for the control target especially DC For example if the external power sup
165. d LEDAIXEND instructions to 32 or less 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Massage CHK FORMAT ERR Checked at STOP PAUSE gt RUN Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Error and Cause Instructions including NOP other than LDX LDIX ANDX and ANIX are included in the CHK instruction circuit block Multiple CHK instructions are given The number of contact points in the CHK instruction circuit block exceeds 150 The LEDAICHK instructions are not paired with the LEDAICHKEND instructions or 2 or more pairs of them are given Format of the block shown below which is provided before the CHK instruction circuit block is not as specified P254 Device number of D1 in the CHK D1 D2 instruction is different from that of the contact point before the CJ Pi instruction Index qualification is used in the check pattern circuit 1 Multiple check pattern circuits of the LEDA CHK LEDA CHKEND instructions are given 2 There are 7 or more check condition circuits in the LEDAICHK LEDA CHKEND instructions 3 The check condition circuits in the LEDA CHK LEDA CHKEND instructions are written without using X and Y contact instructions or compare instructions 4 The check patte
166. d deletion of a program after the program is created To modify the ROM memory cancel the memory write protect OFF Upon shipment the memory write protect is set to OFF SW 1 to 9 OFF Setting Switch Range of memory protection A2USHCPU S1 k bytes A2USCPU S1 A2USCPU A2ASCPU S30 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 0 to 16 16 to 32 32 to 48 48 to 64 64 to 80 Unused 80 to 96 Unused 96 to 112 Unused 112 to 144 Unused 144 to 256 Unused 1 When the memory protect is used refer to the address step number of each memory area Sequence program comment sampling trace status latch and file register to set protection Refer to Section 4 2 2 2 When sampling trace or status latch is executed do not apply the memory protect to the data storage area If the protection is applied the execution results cannot be stored in the memory REMARK When A2SMCA 14KE or A2SNMCA 30KE is used memory protect is possible with the memory protect setting pins on the main unit of the AZSNMCA 30KE Refer to Section 7 1 4 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 5 3 Latch clear operation When performing latch clear by RUN STOP key switch follow the procedures below When performing latch clear devices outside the latch range and error information by self diagnostics of CPU module information on the newest error and the past 15 errors are also cleared 1 Switch the RUN STOP key switch a few times thre
167. d sets all the output points to OFF M L S T C D Retains the condition immediately prior to entering the STOP status OS saves the output status and sets all the output points to OFF STOP RUN Starts 1 Whether in the RUN state STOP state or PAUSE state PLC CPU is Determined by the output mode of the parameter upon STOP RUN performing the following Refresh processing of I O module Data communication with computer link module Link refresh processing Thus even in the STOP or PAUSE status monitoring or testing I O with peripheral devices reading or writing from a computer link module and Starts operations from the condition immediately prior to entering the STOP status Determined by the output mode of the parameter upon STOP RUN communication with other stations by MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET MINI S3 are possible STEP RUN executes the END processing when executes the END FEND instruction during step operation For current value update of the timer the PLC adds 1 by 1 scan on the 10ms timer and adds 1 by 10 scan on the 100ms timer 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 1 3 Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure The PLC CPU detects a momentary power failure when input power voltage supplied to the power supply module becomes lower than the specified range When the PLC CPU detects an instantaneous power failure the following operatio
168. de An error code is stored in the special register 2 When the special relay M9084 is ON checking on fuse blown I O verification and the battery are not performed an error code is not stored in the special register 3 The Error indication of peripheral device in the table of self diagnostics functions are messages indicated by the PLC diagnosis of peripheral devices 4 CPU MODULE mms Si A Self diagnostics list Memory error Diagnosis item Instruction code check Diagnosis timing Upon execution of each instruction Parameter setting check When switching ON or resetting e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN No END instruction Unable to execute instruction e When M9056 or M9057 is ON e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN CJ SCJ JMP CALL P FOR to NEXT e Upon execution of each instruction e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN Format CHK instruction check When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN Unable to execute instruction e When interruption occurred e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP gt RUN CPU module status Status of RUN LED Flickering Contents of error indication INSTRCT CODE ERR Error code D9008 PARAMETER ERROR MISSING END INS CAN T EXECUTE P CHK FORMAT ERR CAN
169. ds Details e 0 1 second 0 2 second 1 second 2 second and 1 minute clocks are generated Not turned on and off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed Starts with off when power is turned on or reset is performed MELSEC A Applicable CPU Unusable with A3V Normally ON ON Normally OFF ON OFF On only for 1 scan after run RUN flag off only for 1 scan after run ON k liscan OFF ON A il 1 scan OFF Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program M9036 and M9037 are turned on and off without regard to position of key switch on CPU front M9038 and M9039 are under the same condition as RUN status except when the key switch is at STOP position and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position M9038 is on for one scan only and M9039 is off for one scan only if the key switch is not in STOP position Usable with all types of CPU PAUSE enable coil OFF PAUSE disabled ON PAUSE enabled PAUSE status contact OFF Not during pause ON During pause When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or remote pause contact has turned on and if M9040 is on PAUSE mode is set and M9041 is turned on Usable with all types of CPU Stop status contact OFF Not during stop ON During stop Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP position Usable with all types of
170. ducts replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice IB NA 66789 J Type A2ZUSHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S1 S30 User s Manual MODEL A2USHCPU S1 U E MODEL 13JL30 IB NA 66789 J 1101 MEE HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NA 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN GOYA WORKS 1 14 When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
171. e Installed in the AAUSHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 main unit Connector terminal block converter unit A6TBXY36 For the sink type input module and sink type output module standard type A6TBXY54 For the sink type input module and sink type output module 2 wire type A1SX41 S1 S2 A1SX42 S1 S2 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY42 A1SY82 A1SH42 S1 A6TBX70 For the sink type input module 3 wire type A18X41 S1 S2 A1SX42 1 S2 A1SH42 S1 A6TBX36 E For the source type input module standard type A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 A6TBY36 E For the source type output module standard type A1SY81 A1SY82 A6TBX54 E For the source type input module 2 wire type A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 A6TBY54 E For the source type output module 2 wire type A1SY81 A1SY82 A6TBX70 E For the source type input module 3 wire type A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 Cable for connector terminal block converter unit ACOSTB 0 5m 1 64ft for the source module AC10TB AC20TB 1m 3 28ft for the source module 2m 6 56ft for the source module AC30TB 3m 9 84ft for the source module ACSOTB 5m 16 40ft for the source module AC80TB 8m 26 24ft for the source module AC100TB 10m 32 81ft for the source module A6TBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 ACOSTB E AC10TB E AC20TB E 0 5m 1 64ft for the source module 1m 3 28ft
172. e Cable clamp Power supply CPU module External wiring cable within 2m 6 56 ft Drive unit 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms S ECO b When wiring with cable that exceeds 2m 6 56ft but is 10m 32 81ft or less e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector Install a ferrite core e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the minimum distance of cable External wiring connector Ferrite core module Cable clamp Power supply CPU module External wiring cable 2 m to 10 m 6 56 ft to 32 81 ft c Ferrite core and cable clamp types and required quantities e Cable clamp Type AD75CK manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation e Ferrite core Type ZCAT3035 1330 manufactured by TDK Corporation Contact TDK Corporation e Required quantity Required Qty Cable length Prepared part Within 2m 6 56ft AD75CK AD75CK 2m 6 56ft to 10m 32 81 ft ZCAT3035 1330 d Cable clamp mounting position Inside control panel A1SD75 20 to 30cm 7 87 to 11 81inch 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms E Si 6 CC Link Module a f 9 Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC Link module close to the ex
173. e the CJ SCJ CALL CALLP JMP LEDA B FCALL O LEDA BBREAK instruction is not provided before the END instruction Read the error step using a peripheral device check contents and insert a jump destination pointer P 1 The RET instruction was included in the program and executed though the CALL instruction was not given 2 The NEXT LEDA BIBREAK instructions were included in the program and executed though the FOR instruction was not given 3 Nesting level of the CALL CALLP and FOR instructions is 6 levels or deeper and the 6th level was executed 4 There is no RET or NEXT instruction at execution of the CALL or FOR instruction 1 Read the error step using a peripheral device check contents and correct program of the step 2 Reduce the number of nesting levels of the CALL CALLP and FOR instructions to 5 or less The CHG instruction was included in the program and executed though no sub program was provided Read the error step using a peripheral device and delete the CHG instruction circuit block 1 LEDAJIX and LEDAIXEND instructions are not paired 2 There are 33 or more sets of LEDAJIX and LEDAIXEND instructions 11 14 1 Read the error step using a peripheral device check contents and correct program of the step 2 Reduce the number of sets of LEDA IX an
174. e cable connected to the power supply terminal of the AJ65SBT RPS or AJ65BT 68TD attach a ferrite core with an attenuation characteristic equivalent to that of the ZCAT3035 1330 from TDK Corporation Twist the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms S ECO 7 CC Link LT module To supply the CL2DA2 B and CL2AD4 B with 24VDC power using the CL1PAD1 keep the length of the power cable from the CL1PAD1 to the 24VDC power supply to 30m or less 8 Measures against static electricity When using an insulation displacement connector without connector cover a connected cable for the connector is thin in applicable wire size and coating Therefore note that the module may cause an electric discharge failure As measures against the failure using pressure displacement type connector whose applicable wire size is thick or soldering type connector is recommended 9 1 4 Power supply module The precautions required for each power supply module are described below Always observe the items noted as precautions Make sure to short the LG and FG terminals with a cable of 6 to 7cm and A1S61PN A1S62PN ground the cable Use the 24VDC panel power supply equipment conforming to the EU 4 AISSI Directive A1SJHCPU S8 Make sure to short and ground the LG and FG terminals Filter attachment to the power cable is not required for the A1S63P product with the version F and
175. e core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT2032 0930 is recommended 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms S ECO c Always use double shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables 2 connected to the 10BASE2 connectors Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield Earth this section Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield 2 Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable The ferrite core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 is recommended Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX Co LTD 4 I O and other communication cables For the I O signal lines including common line and other communication cables RS 232 RS 422 etc if extracted to the outside of the control panel also ensure to earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item 1 above 5 Positioning Modules Precautions to be followed when the machinery conforming to the EMC Directive is configured using the A1SD75PL1 S3 are described below a When wiring with a 2m 6 56ft or less cable e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the minimum distance of cable e Install the drive unit in the same panel External wiring connector modul
176. e is explained Base unit ie Module connector Remove the module installation screw then pull out the top of the module while using the bottom of the module as the fulcrum hole Complete While lifting the module upward disengage the module fixing ee projection from the module fixing 7 aX I DS MELSEC A Module To remove the module the module mounting screw must be removed first then disengage the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole If the module is forcibly removed the module fixing projection will be damaged 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 8 6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover When setting up the system do not allow any empty slot on the base unit If any slot is left empty be sure to use a blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 for it When using the extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 attach the included dustproof cover to the module in slot 0 Otherwise internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to the external I O section J N WARNING When A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 is used it is necessary to install the dustproof cover which is supplied with base to the I O module to be installed to the left end in order to prevent intrusion of foreign material into the I O module Intrusion of foreign matte
177. e midst of I O refresh may be read No wait time for FROM TO instruction Y n 1B 100 to 103 195 Data clear specification for communication faulty station Faulty station detection Retention clear received data M L B T C D W R none Bit device multiples of 16 Retains the received data for batch and separate refresh Sets all points to OFF e Retention Clear Sets the head device to store the faulty stations detected data MINI occupies 4 words MINI S3 occupies 5 words 107 196 to 209 Error No Sets the head device to store the error code at the error occurrence MINI number of remote terminal units words occupies 1 word MINI S3 occupies 1 Line error check setting Line error e Test message sending OFF data sending Immediate data transmission before line errors Sets data sending method for verification of faulty area when the line errors occur n is determined by the installation location of the master modules 2 When the total number of remote I O station is odd add 1 to the station number to obtain the occupied storage devices 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A 2 Setting of the send received data storage devices is explained using the system example shown below lt Example gt When the device X Y400 and later are used as the remote I O stations AX41C Station 1 number of stations occupied 4 stations A18
178. e or four times from STOP to L CLR and then RUN LED turns flicker at high speed about 0 2s ON 0 2s OFF If the RUN LED turns flicker at high speed a latch clear is ready 2 After the RUN LED flickers at high speed switch the RUN STOP key switch from STOP to L CLR again and then the latch clear is all prepared and RUN LED turns off In the case of cancelling the latch clear operation halfway switch the RUN STOP key switch to RUN to lead the CPU module to RUN status or switch to RESET to lead it to reset status REMARK The latch clear can also be performed by the operation of GPP function For instance latch clear by AGGPP can be performed by Device memory all clear of the PLC mode test function For the operation method refer to the operating manual for GPP functions 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms SECO A 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specifications Specifications of power supply modules are shown below Base mounting position Table 5 1 Power supply module specifications Performance specifications A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Power supply module installing slot Input power supply 30 10 24VDC 35 100 to 240VAC 450 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC Input frequency 50 60HZ 5 Input voltage distortion Within 5 See Section 8 8 Max input apparent power 105VA 41W Inrush current Rated output current 20A 8ms or lower 4 81A 1ms or lower
179. e with all types of CPUs Remote information terminal card No I O module or remote terminal module or initial communication impossible Input module or remote terminal module Output module Stores information of I O modules and remote terminal modules connected to the A2C and A52G corresponding to station number Information of I O modules and remote terminal modules is for input output and remote terminal module identification and expressed as 2 bit data 00 No I O module or remote terminal module or initial communication is impossible 01 Input module or remote terminal module 10 Output module Data configuration b15 b14b13 b12b11b10b9 b8b7 b6b5 b4b3 b2b1 _ b0 Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station D9133 Station 16 Station Station Station Station Station 56 55 54 53 D9140 Station Station Station Station Station 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 APP 40 Usable with A2C and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Number Description Details Applicable CPU D9141 D9142 D9143 D9144 D9145 D9146 Stores the number of retries executed to I O modules D9147 or remote terminal modules which caused D9148 communication error Retry processing is executed the number of times set D9149 at D9174 D9150 Data becomes 0 when communication is restored to norma
180. ead wire is broken The battery duration maximum life is 5 years 43 800 hours For details of how to cheak a hardwear version refer to Section 4 5 1 Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows 1 Replace a battery in 4 or 5 years even when the battery has been used less than the guaranteed time shown in the table above 2 Replace a battery when the battery has been used exceeding the guaranteed time and M9006 is on 10 5 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC A 1 Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life If the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed time perform ROM operation to protect data in case that the battery will be exhausted during power off of the programmable controller Or after M9006 turns on back up data within the backup power time When the battery AGBAT is not connected to the CPU module its service life is five years When the battery low special relay M9006 turns on immediately change the battery Even if an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating condition 10 6 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION es ELL SEC A 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure Replace the battery according to the following procedure when life of the battery is over Even when the battery is removed memory is backed up by the capacitor for a while However if replacement takes longer than
181. ed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had
182. eeeaeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeneaas 6 9 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY 7 1to7 7 AA Meno Cassola eisen TA AAE ze vasene Sens astea Soedasuandete edad AE A deanna 7 1 Ta Specifications ias eeii a adi ctaee a ea a a e aaae a aaa aa aaa i asadnetl aad ea 7 1 7 1 2 Handling precautions iessen AEA A AA ARARA T EET T ear RATE ETA 7 2 7 1 3 Installation and removal of memory Cassette cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseenaeeees 7 3 7 1 4 Memory protection setting of AZSNMCA 30KE 00 eee eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeteeaeeess 7 5 Te BAUR cast scenes En 2 Da te Daye nace Sea bas ces ota aba pe Leda ag he cvnsa T 7 6 F 21 Specifications iin e a aie ae eed eh eves ded eta eee ness a aaa a le eaaa aaia aaa e nae 7 6 222 Handling precautions osese aniani tessa dade daa a didani daiat aa yena iia Eda daaa dta devatade 7 6 Taa Batany Moal MON aaa EAR EA E TA 7 7 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 8 1 to 8 22 8 1 Eail Safe Circuit Concept 2 00 c2 cen eee e a aea a a ed eRe 8 1 8 2 Installation Environment cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseccncaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesenaaees 8 6 8 3 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PLC 0 iceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeetteeeeeeeea 8 7 8 4 Installing the Base Units ccccceccessccscceeesescedaneeecnsedeestecenedenseseaceenenteaaeeensbeccaeenenseaneddheneaaeeeennene 8 9 8 4 1 Precautions when installing programmable cController
183. eeeeecneaeeceeeeeeeesesenesnneeaeeeeeees App 61 Appendix 5 4 Extension base Uniit ccccccecceeeeeeeeneeceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeaaaeaecceeeeeeeeseseecsnceeaeeeeeees App 62 Appendix 5 4 1 A1S65B extension base UNit ccccccceceeeeeeeeeececeeeceeeeeeeesesesestaeeaeeeeeess App 62 Appendix 5 4 2 A1S68B extension base UNit cccccceceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteessnnaeeaeeeeeees App 62 Appendix 5 4 3 A1S52B extension base Unit ccccccceceeeeeeeeeneeceeeceeeeeeeeseteesstceeaeeeeeess App 63 Appendix 5 4 4 A1S55B extension base Unit ccccccececeeeeeeesenceceeeceeeeeeeeseteeesnnaeeaeeeeees App 63 Appendix 5 4 5 A1S58B extension base UNnit ccccccceceeeeeeeeeececaeeceeeeeeeesesenesnneeaeeeeeees App 64 Appendix 5 4 6 A1S65B S1 extension base Unit eee cence eeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas App 64 Appendix 5 4 7 A1S68B S1 extension base Unit ccc ce ceeeeececeecceeeeeeeeseteeesnaeeeeeeeeees App 65 Appendix 5 4 8 A1S52B S1 extension base Unit eee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaas App 65 Appendix 5 4 9 A1S55B S1 extension base Unit eee cence eeenceeeeeeeeneeeeseeneeeeeeeeaas App 66 Appendix 5 4 10 A1S58B S1 extension base Unit ccccceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeesnneeaeeetees App 66 Appendix 5 5 Memory Cassette cccccccceceeeeeeseeeeenneceeeeeeeeeeeesecaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeesesenesecaesaeeeeeess App 67 Appendix 5 5 1 A2SNMCA 30KE memory cassette
184. ees 8 13 N Noise fillets iced cect ccecwusadtedineseadacesavncsgccanrnea tenes 9 10 Notes Battery handling precautions ee 7 6 CPU module handling precautions 4 44 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS oee A 1 DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS A 7 Memory cassette handling precautions 7 2 Precaustions for Utilizing the Existing Sequence PLOQrAMS eaaa aii aiaa App 51 Precautions for using coaxial cables 9 5 Precautions When Configuring the System 2 3 Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply ceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 8 22 Precautions when installing PC n se 8 9 Precautions when using A8PU peripheral devices EEE E anne E EE E 2 10 Precautions when using GPP function software packages which are not compatible with AnU NT E E E N AE TEE AN 2 10 Precautions when using the MELSEC AnS series PE O E E icceineaededesmnante 9 12 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS piirini nininini A 5 Transportation Precautions App 68 USER PRECAUTONSG ccceeeeteeees A 17 Wiring instructions ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 8 16 Number of I O device points 0008 4 1 4 4 Number of I O points ccccccecseee eee eeees 4 1 4 4 O Operation standard of extension base unit 6 3 Overall Configuration 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 1 Overview of operation processing 0 4 7 P Parameter setting
185. egister Comment Comment Extension file register Extension file register 2 For AZUSCPU S1 AZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 a During RAM operation b During EP ROM operation Parameter T C set value Sequence program MELSECNET 10 network parameters ROM memory capacity Unusable maximum 64k bytes Not used 3k bytes Parameter 1k byte 1 to 14k steps 2 to 28k bytes Change into Expansion comment aROM T C set value Sampling trace area Sequence program MELSECNET 10 Memory area of the built in RAM A2USCPU A2ASCPU 64k bytes A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S1 256k bytes network parameters Expansion comment Sampling trace area Extension file register File register Comment Extension file register Extension file register File register Comment A2USCPU A2ASCPU 64k bytes A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S 14k bytes Extension file register 4 CPU MODULE ems ELS EC A b When the main program is made into E PROM Even when making the main program into E PROM the extension file register cannot be enlarged because the built in RAM area area shown in the following figure will be used in the system Applicable memory cassette A2SNMCA 30KE 1 For AAUSHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 b During E7PROM operation Parameter T C set value a During RAM operation Sequence program
186. el 200kPPS difference input transistor output sink type 32 sp points ecial A1SD62D S1 24 bit signed binary 2 channel 200kPPS difference input transistor output sink type 32 sp points ecial A1SD62E A1S64AD 24 bit signed binary 2 channel 100kPPS DC input transistor output source type 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V 4 analog channels 32 sp points 32 sp points ecial ecial A1S68AD A1S62DA 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V 8 analog channels 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V 2 analog output channels 32 sp points 32 sp points ecial ecial A1S68DAV 10 to 10V input 8 analog output channels 32 sp points ecial A1S68DAI 4 to 20mA input 8 analog output channels 32 sp points ecial Analog I O module A1S63ADA Analog input 2 channels simple loop control is allowed 1 analog output channels 32 sp points ecial A1S66ADA Analog input 4 channels simple loop control is allowed 2 analog output channels 64 sp points ecial Remark 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION eens ELS EC A Product Name Temperature digital converter module Model Name A1S62RD3 Description For connecting to Pt100 3 wire Temperature input 2 channels Number of occupied points points I O allocation module type 32 special points Current Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Remark A1S62RD4 For connecting to Pt1
187. emission Test item CISPR16 2 3 Radiated emission 2 Test description Radio waves from the product are measured Value specified in standard 30M 230MHz QP 40dB 4 V m 10m in measurement range ol 230M 1000MHz QP 47dB 4 V m 10m in measurement range CISPR16 2 1 CISPR16 1 2 Conducted emission 2 Noise from the product to the power line is measured 1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 2 Programmable controllers are open type devices devices designed to be housed inside other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel 2 Regulations regarding immunity Test item EN61000 4 2 Electrostatic discharge immunity 1 Test description Immunity test in which electrostatic is applied to the cabinet of the equipment 150k 500kHz QP 79dB Mean 66dB 500k 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB Value specified in standard e 8kV Air discharge 4kV Contact discharge EN61000 4 3 Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity Immunity test in which electric fields are irradiated to the product 80 AM modulation 1kHz 80M 1000MHz 10V m 1 4G 2 0GHz 3V m 2 0G 2 7GHz 1V m EN61000 4 4 Electrical fast transient burst immunity a Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal line e
188. ence of corrosive gasses Judgement 0 to 55 C 10 to 90 RH There is no corrosive gas present When used in a panel temperature inside the panel is the ambient temperature Line voltage check Measure voltage between 100 200VAC terminals 85 to 264VAC Change the power supply 2 D fo c 2 5 w o S n c Connection conditions Loosening backlash Test by moving the module Must be installed solidly Retighten the screw Adhesion of dirt or foreign matters Loosening of terminal screw Visual inspection Retighten with a screwdriver No adhesion No loosening Remove and clean Retighten Proximity of solderless terminals Visual inspection There is an appropriate distance Correct the distance Loosening of connector Battery Visual inspection Confirm M9006 or M9007 is OFF with a peripheral device in the monitoring mode 10 3 No loosening Preventive maintenance Retighten the connector fixing screw Even when there is no low battery display replace if specified life is exceeded 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC A 10 3 Battery Replacement Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst
189. ent humidity falls outside the range of 10 to 90 RH 3 Location in which condensation may occur due to drastic changes in temperature 4 A location in which corrosive gas or combustible gas exists 5 A location in which a lot of conductive powdery substance such as dust and iron filing oil mist salt or organic solvent exists 6 A location exposed to direct sunlight 7 A location in which strong electric fields or magnetic fields form 8 A location in which the main unit is exposed to direct vibration or impact 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 8 3 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PLC It is necessary to keep the temperature of the panel which stores the PLC to the operating ambient temperature of the PLC which is 55 C or below For heat dissipation design of the panel it is necessary to know the average power consumption heat generation of the devices and machinery stored inside In this section a method to obtain the average power consumption of the PLC system is explained Calculate the temperature rise inside the panel from the power consumption Calculation method of average power consumption The power consuming parts of the PLC may be roughly classified into the blocks as shown below 5VDC line Output module CPU module Relay transistor i laav 24VDC line External Output current 24VDC louT X Verop power supply 1 Power c
190. ents of D9124 When RST F or LEDR instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of D9124 If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU pressing the switch can execute the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is stored into D9124 in BIN code The quantity turned on with SET F is stored up to 8 APP 39 Dedicated to A0J2H Usable with all types of CPUs APPENDICES mms Si Number detection number Annunciator Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Annunciator detection number Details e When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AnA and AnU is turned on by SET F F number which has turned on is entered into D9125 to D9132 in due order in BIN code F number which has been turned off by RST F is erased from D9125 to D9132 and the contents of data registers succeeding the data register where the erased F number was stored are shifted to the preceding data registers By executing LEDR instruction the contents of D9125 to D9132 are shifted upward by one With a CPU equipped with an INDICATOR RESET switch the same process occurs when the switch is pressed When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one is not stored into D9125 to 9132 even if detected SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET Be as os oe an oa a Applicable CPU Usabl
191. er supply module is re powered ON right after powered OFF within 5seconds the inrush current exceeding the specified value 2ms or less may be generated Therefore make sure to re power ON the module 5seconds after power off When selecting a fuse or breaker for external circuit consider the above point as well as blown and detection characteristics 5 5 1 1 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms l SECO A Power supply module selection Power supply module is selected based on to the total current consumption of the I O module special function module and peripheral devices to which power is supplied by the subject power supply module When extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B is used take into consideration that the power to the module is supplied by the power supply module of the main base For 5VDC current consumption of I O modules special function modules and peripheral devices refer to Section 2 3 1 Power supply module VO module A1SX10 A1SY10 etc Special function module A1SD61 A1SD71 S2 etc Peripheral device AD71TU When making a selection current consumption of the peripheral devices connected to the special function module must be taken into account For example if AD71TU is connected to A18D71 S2 the current consumption of the AD71TU must be considered also Peripheral device A8PU A6BWU etc Power supply module selection whe
192. er up to 00H code PR r Output to printer Intended number of PRN characters Data read to memory card GET Data write to memory card PUT AD57 S1 control instructions Display mode setting instruction Screen display control instructions Cursor control instructions Display condition setting instructions Canvas screen display VRAM display address change Canvas transfer Screen clear VRAM clear Scroll up down Cursor display Cursor erase Cursor position setting Forward reverse rotation of characters to be displayed Forward reverse rotation of characters Character color specification Character color change App 11 CMODE CPS1 CPS2 CMOV CLS CLV CSCRU CSCRD CON1 CON2 COFF LOCATE CNOR CREV CRDSP CRDSPV COLOR CCDSP CCDSPV Continued APPENDICES mms S ECO Specified character display instructions Fixed character display instructions ASCII character display ASCII character write Character display Character write Continuous display of same character minus display hyphen display period decimal point display Numeric character display Alphanumeric character display Space display Specified column clear instruction Conversion instructions for displayed text string into ASCII code VRAM data control instructions Data read Data write Display status read instruction A
193. erminal error Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Normal ON Error Details Turned on when one of remote terminal modules has become a faulty station Communication error is detected when normal communication is not restored after the number of retries set at D9174 Turned off when communication with all re mote terminal modules is restored to normal with automatic online return enabled Remains on when automatic online return is disabled Not turned on or off when communication is suspended at error detection Applicable CPU Usable with A2C and A52G Communication error OFF Normal ON Error Turned on when communication with a remote terminal module or an I O module is faulty Communication error occurs due to the following reasons e Initial data error Cable breakage Power off for remote terminal modules or I O modules Turned off when communication is restored to normal with automatic online return enabled Remains on when communication is suspended at error detection with automatic online return disabled Usable with A2C and A52G Divided transfer status OFF Other than divided processing ON Divided processing Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at completion of divided processing Usable with AnA and AnU Transfer processing switching OFF Batch transfer ON Divided transfer
194. ers which have turned on is stored in BIN code D9009 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of D9009 causes the next number to be stored in D9009 Unusable with A3 A3N A3A A73 and A3N board When one of FO to 255 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code D9009 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU front to ON position If another F number has been detected the clearing of D9009 causes the nest number to be stored in D9009 APP 28 Usable with A3 A3N A3A A73 and A3N board APPENDICES mms Si Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Number Description Details Applicable CPU When operation error has occurred during execution of Step number at which application instruction the step number at which the Error step operation error has error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter occurred each time operation error occurs the contents of D9010 are renewed Unusable with A3H and A3M When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since Usable with all storage into D9011 is made when M9011 changes from types of CPUs off to on the contents of D9
195. es App 60 Memory Cassette ccceeeeeeeeees App 67 Power supply module ccceeeee App 59 External dimensions ccceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 3 4 6 F Fail Safe Fail Safe Circuiti 8 4 Fail safe measures cccccceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 8 4 Fault Examples with I O Modules 11 23 Faults in the output circuit 0 0 cece 11 25 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective ACUONS task dccieccesseaaene teed a a 11 23 Features cecceccecccececcceceeeeeeeeseseeeecenaeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Ferrite Core anaa iaaa 9 9 File register R 2 cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 4 2 4 5 Function Listini epini adii 4 42 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting 45 11 1 H Hardware cccceccceceececeeeeeeeeesecceecaecaeeeeeeeeeees 2 3 I Index register V Z eesecceeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 Initial processing cceeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeteeteteteees 4 7 Index 1 ems SECA Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover adh Me neueddenan seahadat a a a a 8 14 Installation Environment ccccceeeeeeees 8 6 Instantaneous power failure 0 0 cee 4 12 Instruction List 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeees APP 1 Instructions with different specifications App 52 Intensive insulation ceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 9 15 Internal power consumption 0 00 4 3 4 6 Internal relay
196. es a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 2 4 Control panel Because the programmable controller is an open device a device designed to be stored within another device be sure to use it after storing in the control panel 1 Also each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel However the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel Shock protection In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as the operators from electric shocks the control panel must have the following functions a The control panel must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open it b The control panel must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is opened c For electric shock protection use IP20 or greater control panel Dustproof and waterproof features The control panel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our programmable controller is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or
197. esponds to D9114 OFF Monitoring timer reset ON Monitoring timer reset start Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer is started Turned off when the monitoring timer is reset Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 24 Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G APPENDICES mms Si Number Active step sampling trace complete flag Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Trace start ON Trace complete Details e Turned on when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed Turned off when sampling trace is started Applicable CPU Usable with AnN AnA Anu A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C AOJ2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G Active step sampling trace execution flag OFF Trace not executed ON Trace being executed Turned on when sampling trace is being executed Turned off when sampling trace is completed or suspended Usable with AnN AnA Anu A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C AOJ2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G Active step sampling trace enable OFF Trace disable suspend ON Trace enable Selects sampling trace execution enable disable ON Sampling trace execution is enabled OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled If turned off during sa
198. ess Installation location Control panel Over voltage category Pollution degree 2 Equipment category This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 2 _ This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionally 3 Do not use or store the programmable controller in the environment when the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure at sea level Otherwise malfunction may result To use the programmable controller in high pressure environment please contact your local Mitsubishi representative 3 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS mms SECA 4 When an A series extension base unit A52B A55B A58B A62B A65B A68B is used in the system the following specifications apply Under intermittent vibration Frequency 10 to 57Hz Acceleration Amplitude 0 075mm 0 003in 57 to 150Hz Sweep count 10 times each in X Y Z directions Under continuous vibration
199. f CC Link dedicated command executed in one scan exceeded 10 1 Read the error step using a peripheral device and correct the program meeting loaded conditions of remote terminal modules 2 Use special register D9081 number of empty entries in mailbox or special relay M9081 BUSY signal of mail box to suppress registration or execution of the PRC instruction 3 Correct the program specified by the IZCHG instruction to other 4 Set the number of CC Link dedicated commands executed in one scan to 10 or less MAIN CPU DOWN 1 The CPU malfunctioned due to noise 2 Hardware failure 1 Take proper countermeasures for noise 2 Hardware failure 1 The power supply module detected an incorrect power waveform 2 Failure in the power module CPU module main base unit or expansion cable is detected 1 Correct the power waveform applied to the power supply module 2 Replace the power module CPU module main base unit or expansion cable BATTERY ERROR Checked at power on Continue 1 Battery voltage has lowered below specified level 2 Battery lead connector is not connected 11 22 1 Replace battery 2 If a RAM memory or power failure compensation function is used connect the lead connector 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si A 11 4 Fault Examples with I O Modules Examples of faults concerning I O circuits and the cor
200. fer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 25 Usable with AnU A2AS and QCPU A A Mode Usable with AnU A2AS and QCPU A A Mode APPENDICES MELSEC A POINTS 1 Contents of the M special relays are all cleared by power off latch clear or reset with the reset key switch When the RUN STOP key switch is set in the STOP position the contents are retained 2 The above relays with numbers marked 1 remain on if normal status is restored Therefore to turn them off use the following method a Method by use program Reset execution Insert the circuit shown at right into command the user program and turn on the E RST yeou reset execution command contact to Special function relay to be reset clear the special relay M P 4 b Use the test function of the peripheral device to reset forcibly For the operation procedure refer to the manuals for peripheral devices c By moving the RESET key switch on the CPU front to the RESET position the special relays are turned off Special relays marked 2 above are switched on off in the sequence program Special relays marked 3 above are switched on off in test mode of the peripheral equipment Turn OFF the following special relays after resetting the related special resisters Unless the related special registers are reset the special relays will be turned ON again even if they are turned reset Except for the AnU A2US H and QCPU A A mode
201. for the source module 2m 6 56ft for the source module AC30TB E 3m 9 84ft for the source module ACSOTB E 5m 16 40ft for the source module A6TBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E Relay terminal unit A6TE2 16SRN For the sink type output module A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY42 A1SH42 S1 Cable for connecting the relay terminal unit ACO6TE 0 6m 1 97ft long AC10TE AC30TE 1m 3 28ft long 3m 9 84 ft long ACSOTE 5m 16 40ft long AC100TE 10m 32 81ft long A6TE2 16SRN Terminal block cover for the A1S I O module and the special module A1STEC S Slim type terminal block cover for the A1S I O module and the special module terminal block connector type All terminal block connector type modules 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ees ELS EC A Product Name Model Name Description Applicable model IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 5mm AWG20 A1S TA32 IDC terminal block A1S TA32 3 IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 3mm adapter AWG22 A18X41 S1 S2 A1SX71 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY71 IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 75mm2 AWG18 A1S TA32 7 Terminal block A1S TB32 For 32 points conversion into Europe type terminal A1SX41 S1 S2 A1SX71 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY71 adapter block A6CON1 Soldering type straight out A6CON2 Solderless type straight out 40 pin connector Sink type 40p
202. ft 1 08ft 3 94ft 19 69ft 1 48ft 16 43ft Cable length Resistive value of 5VDC supply line 0 02Q 0 022 0 042 0 062 0 12Q 0 18Q 0 04Q 0 052 0 12Q 0 18Q at 55 C Application Connection between a main base and A1S50 B S1 A1S60B S1 Connection between a main base and A50 B A60 B Weight 0 025kg 0 10kg 0 14kg 0 20kg 0 40kg 0 65kg 0 20kg 0 22kg 0 40kg 0 56kg When using the extension cable do not bundle it with the main circuit cables together which has high voltage large current or install them close to each other 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms E Sl 6 1 3 Applicable standards of extension base units A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B Extension base unit used A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 extension base unit is used When using the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B extension base unit make sure that the voltage of the receiving port the module installed in the last slot of the extension base unit is 4 75V or more Since the power supply module on the main base unit supplies 5V DC to the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B extension base unit a voltage drop occurs through the base unit and extension cable If the specified voltage is not supplied at the receiving port incorrect input or output may result If the voltage at the receiving port is less than 4 75V replace the extension unit wit
203. g modified by erroneous operation of peripheral equipment Setting the memory protection setting pin to ON allows the user memory area of 64k bytes to be protected all at once To modify the ROM memory disable the memory protection OFF The memory protection setting pin is set to OFF as factory default For memory area assignment refer to Section 4 5 2 Memory protection setting pin Shows the memory protection canceled status A2SNMCA 30KE 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY MELSEC A 7 2 Battery This section explains the specifications handling precautions and installation procedures of the battery Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst and or ignition J N WARNING 7 2 1 Specifications The specifications of the battery used for power failure compensation are shown in Table 7 2 Table7 2 Battery specifications Classification Thionyl chloride lithium battery Initial voltage 3 6VDC Battery life when stored 5 years Lithium content 0 48g Application IC RAM memory backup and power failure compensation External dimensions 16mm 0 63inch x 30mm 1 18inch REMARK For the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix7 7 2 2 Handling precautions This se
204. g the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTSs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region Revision The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Daie Manual Number Jun 1997 IB NA 66789 A First edition IB NA 66789 B Equivalent to the Japanese version C SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Chapter 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 Chapter 3 Section 4 1 4 4 2 2 4 2 5 Section 5 1 5 2 Section 6 1 2 6 1 3 Section 7 1 1 7 1 5 Section 8 1 Chapter 9 Section 10 3 2 Appendix 2 1 2 2 Appendix 4 2 Dec 2003 IB NA 66789 C A1SY42P SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 1 Section 2 2 1 2 3 Section 7 2 1 Section 8 4 1 8 8 Section 9 1 3 9 1 4 Section 11 3 2 Appendix 7 7 1 7 2 Oct 2006 IB NA 66789 D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 2 Section 2 2 1 2 3 Chapter 3 Section 4 1 4 1 3 4 1 5 4 2 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 1 Section 5 1 5 2 Section 6 1 1 6 1 3 6 2 Section 7 2 Section 8 1 8 4 1 8 5 8 6 8 7 1 8 7 2 8 8 Chapter 9 9 1 3 9 2 4 9 2 6 Chapter 10 Section 10 3 10 3 1 10
205. ged after normal status is restored For this reason use one of the following methods to clear the registers a Method by user program Insert the circuit shown at right into ec ia the program and turn on the clear fn H RST nss execution command contact to clear Special function register to be cleared the contents of register Method by peripheral equipment Set the register to 0 by changing the present value by the test function of peripheral equipment or set to 0 by forced reset For the operation procedure refer to the Instruction Manual for peripheral equipment By moving the RESET key switch at the CPU front to the RESET position the special register is set to 0 Data is written to special registers marked 2 above in the sequence program Data is written to special registers marked 3 above in test mode of the peripheral equipment APP 45 APPENDICES eee ELS EC A Appendix3 Peripheral Device 1 The following table shows peripheral devices used in the existing systems and applicability of the system FD Model name of the peripheral device A6GPP A6PHP a For A2USHCPU S1 Model name of the software package SW4GP GPPA Applicability Usable Applicable range Device range of A3ACPU PLC model name at start up SW3GP GPPA Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier SW3 HGPA Not usable Usable Device range of ASHCPU SW2 type or earlier Not usable Us
206. h the A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A62B A65B or A68B model that has a power supply 1 Selection condition Receiving voltage of the module installed in the last slot of the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B extension base unit shall be 4 75V or more The output voltage of the power supply module is set to 5 1V or more Thus a voltage drop of 0 35V or less allows use of the module 2 Elements of voltage drop There are the following elements of voltage drop a to c depending on the connection method and type of the extension base unit a Voltage drop in the main base unit b Voltage drop in the extension base unit c Voltage drop in the extension cable Extension cable is connected to the left Extension cable is connected to the right side of the main base unit in series side of the main base unit parallel installation B S1 b The voltage drop in the main base unit can be ignored A52B A55B or A58B extension base unit is used The voltage drop in the main base unit The voltage drop in the extension base unit can and extension base unit can be ignored be ignored 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms SECO A 3 Receiving voltage calculation method 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 1
207. hazardous voltage voltage of 42 4V or more at the peak area For a power supply module with 24VDC rated input a conventional model can be used 2 I O module For I O module with rated I O voltage of 100 200VAC select a model in which the internal area between the first order and second order is intensively insulated because it has hazardous voltage area For I O module with 24VDC rated input a conventional model can be used 3 CPU module memory cassette base unit Conventional models can be used for these modules because they only have a 5VDC circuit inside 4 Special function module Conventional models can be used for the special function modules including analog module network module and positioning module because the rated voltage is 24VDC or smaller 5 Display device Use the CE marked product 9 12 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 2 3 Power supply The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category II Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the programmable controller The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Category IV Category III Category II Category Figure9 1 Installation Category Category II indicat
208. he file register setting 0 to 4032 points 64 points unit in 1k byte units When comment capacity is set up 1k byte is added to the memory area 0 to 3968 points 64 points unit in 1k byte units Status latch Sampling trace No parameter setting Performed by setting up extension file registers to store device and result in each of status latch and sampling trace modes Refer to the Type ACPU QCPU A A Mode Fundamentals Programming Manual Latch range setting latch Link relay B Timer T Counter C Data register D Link register W Settings for internal relay M latch relay L step relay S e Latch L1000 to L2047 only e None for others MO to M999 M2048 to M8191 L1000 to L2047 None for S A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 BO to B1FFF unit 1 point A2ASCPU A2ZASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 BO to BFFF unit 1 point TO to T255 unit 1 point T256 to T2047 unit 1 point CO to C255 unit 1 point C256 to C1023 unit 1 point A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 DO to D8191 unit 1 point A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 DO to D6143 unit 1 point A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 WO to W1FFF unit 1 point A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 WO to WFFF unit 1 point M L SO to M L S8191 where M L S are serial numbers 4 CPU MODULE ems ELS EC A List of parameter setting range From the previous page Timer settings
209. iffer from the actual network system 2 The link parameters for the second link unit have not been written 3 The setting for the total number of stations is 0 When using MELSECNET 10 1 The contents of the network parameters for the third link unit written from a peripheral device differ from the actual network system 2 The link parameters for the third link unit have not been written 3 The setting for the total number of stations is 0 When using MELSECNET 10 1 The contents of the network parameters for the fourth link unit written from a peripheral device differ from the actual network system 2 The link parameters for the fourth link unit have not been written 3 The setting for the total number of stations is 0 A ink parameter error was detected by the CC Link module 11 20 1 Write the parameters again and check 2 Check the station number settings 3 Persistent error occurrence may indicate a hardware fault Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative explaining the nature of the problem 1 Write the parameters in again and check 2 If the error appears again there is a problem with the hardware Consult your nearest System Service sales office or branch office 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms E SECO A Error Massage OPERATION ERROR Checked at execution of instruction Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU a
210. ing MELSECNET 10 1 The transfer source device range and transfer destination device range specified for the inter network transfer parameters are in the same network 2 The specified range of transfer source devices or transfer destination devices for the inter network transfer parameters spans two or more networks 3 The specified range of transfer source devices or transfer destination devices for the inter network transfer parameters is not used by the network Write the network parameters again and check When using MELSECNET 10 The contents of the routing parameters written from a peripheral device differ from the actual network system 11 19 Write the routing parameters again and check 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A E SECO A Error Massage LINK PARA ERROR Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Continue Error and Cause When using MELSECNET 10 1 The contents of the network parameters for the first link unit written from a peripheral device differ from the actual network system 2 The link parameters for the first link unit have not been written 3 The setting for the total number of stations is 0 When using MELSECNET 10 1 The contents of the network parameters for the second link unit written from a peripheral device d
211. ion Master control MC MCR f End instruction Program end FEND END g Other instructions Stop STOP No operation NOP Page break Page break operation for printer NOPLF output App 1 APPENDICES mms Si 2 Basic instructions a Comparison instructions 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit A V i yy 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit b BIN arithmetic operation instructions 16 bit Addition 32 bit 16 bit Subtraction 32 bit Multiplication 16 bit 32 bit 16 bit Division 32 bit 16 bit 1 Addition 32 bit 16 bit 1 Subtraction 32 bit App 2 LD AND OR LDD ANDD ORD LD lt gt AND lt gt OR lt gt LDD lt gt ANDD lt gt ORD lt gt LD gt AND gt OR gt LDD gt ANDD gt ORD gt LD lt AND lt OR lt LDD lt ANDD lt ORD lt LD lt AND lt OR lt LDD lt ANDD lt ORD lt LD gt AND gt OR gt LDD gt ANDD gt ORD gt Two types each for P Two types each for D D P Two types each for P Two types each for D D P D D P INC INCP DINC DINCP DEC DECP DDEC DDECP APPENDICES mms Si c BCD arithmetic operation instructions BCD 4 digit Addition BCD 8 digit BCD 4 digit Subtraction BCD 8 digit BCD 4 digit Multiplication BCD 8 digit BCD 4 digit Division BCD
212. ion Up to 6 characters in hexadecimal 0 to 9 A to F MELSECNET 10 link range setting Number of link stations 1O X Y Link relay B Link register W Optical link Max 64 stations Coaxial link Max 32 stations XIYO to X Y1FFF unit 16 points A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2USCPU S1 BO to B1FFF unit 16 points A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 BO to BFFF unit 16 points A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU A2ZUSCPU S1 WO to W1FFF unit 1 point A2ASCPU A2ZASCPU S1 AZASCPU S30 WO to WFFF unit 1 point 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A List of parameter setting range From the previous page Link range settings for MELSECNET II Number of link stations VO X Y Link relay B Link register W Default value Setting range A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 A2USCPU A2ASCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 0 to 64 station s X Y0 to X Y3FF in 16 point units X Y0 to X Y1FF in 16 point units X Y0 to X Y3FF in 16 point units BO to BFFF in 16 point units WO to WFFF in 1 point units MELSECNET MINI MELSECNET MINI S3 Latch range setting Number of supported modules Head I O number Model name registration Transmission reception data Number of retries FROM TO response setting Faulty station data Faulty station detection Error No Number of total remote stations Sending state setting d
213. is not necessary 5 6 8 3 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 2 Fail safe measures to cover the possibility of programmable controller failure Problems with a CPU module and memory can be detected by the self diagnostics function However problems with I O control area may not be detected by the CPU module In such cases there is a possibility of setting all points to ON or OFF or a situation may develop where normal operations and safety of the controlled subject cannot be assured depending on the condition of the failure Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control they may fail or malfunction due to unspecified reasons To prevent the whole system failure machine breakdown and accidents build a fail safe circuit outside the programmable controller Examples of a system and its fail safe circuitry are described below lt System example gt Output Power CPU Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Power Output Output Output 16 supply nodule 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 supply 16 16 16 points Empty module points points points points points points points points module points points points ypo to YBF Output module for fail safe purpose 1 The output module for fail safe purpose should be mounted on the last slot of the system Y
214. it of control panel or to any of the CC Link stations within 30cm 11 81inch from the module or stations The CC Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable As shown in the illustration below remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface area of the exposed shield part as possible tC Link dedicated cable Shield Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable The CC Link module the CC Link stations and the FG line inside the control panel should be connected the FG terminal as shown in the diagram below Simplified diagram Master module Remote module Local module DA r x DB Terminal Terminal resistor DG resistor CC Link SLD CC Link dedicated FG dedicated cable cable Each power line connecting to the external power supply terminal or module power supply terminal must be 30m 98 43 ft or less Install a noise filter to the external power supply Use a noise filter with an attenuation characteristic equivalent to that of the MA1206 TDK Lambda Corporation Note that a noise filter is not required when the module is used in Zone A defined in EN61131 2 Keep the length of signal cables connected to the analog input terminals of the following modules to 30m or less Wire cables connected to the external power supply and module power supply terminal in the control panel where the module is installed e AJ65BT 64RD3 e AJ65BT 64RD4 e AJ65BT 68TD For th
215. ite to the CPU module Conventional product PLC A3A start up Product used to read from the CPU module New Product PLC A3A start up New Product PLC A3A start up Conventional product PLC A3A start up Compatibility All the data are compatible Conventional product PLC A3A start up New Product PLC A3U start up New Product PLC A3U start up Conventional product PLC A3A start up App 48 Because the PLC model names are different between in writing and in reading the following conditions are identified 1 Ifthe verification is performed after reading mismatch is identified The data can be used 2 Set values of the sampling trace status latch data stored in the CPU module will not be displayed 3 When the network parameters are set to the new product they will not be displayed on the conventional product APPENDICES ems ELS EC A b For A2USCPU S1 Product used to write to the CPU module Conventional product PLC A2A start up Product used to read from the CPU module New Product PLC A2A start up New Product PLC A2A start up Conventional product PLC A2A start up Compatibility All the data are compatible Conventional product PLC A2A start up New Product PLC A2U start up New Product PLC A2U start up Conventional product PLC A2A start up c For A2SCPU S30 Product
216. kering ON SP UNIT ERROR Link parameter error e When switching from STOP PAUSE to RUN STEP RUN Operate LINK PARA ERROR Low battery Always However not checked when M9084 is ON Operate ON BATTERY ERROR Operation error 1 Default stop Upon execution of each instruction Stop Operate Flickering ON OPERATION ERROR 2 lt CHK gt ERRORO 00 14 Can be changed by the parameter settings of the peripheral devices 2 Indicated as a three digit trouble code only for errors with the CHK instruction 4 4 1 5 CPU MODULE E ELS EC A Device list Device Device means a general name for such as a contact coil and timer used on the program operations in a PLC Usage ranges and device names of the PLC are shown below For in the devices below they can be used by setting the parameters on each peripheral device Also they can be changed the usage ranges allocation Set the parameters depending on the usage system and contents of the programs For the detailed setting for parameters refer to Section 4 2 1 List of parameter setting range Device list Range of usage points A2USHCPU S1 X Y0 to X Y3FF 1024 points A2USCPU A2ASCPU X Y0 to X Y1FF 512 points A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 X Y0 to X Y3FF 1024 points Description of device Used for the supply PLC commands and data from the e
217. l D9151 e Station number setting of I O modules and remote D9152 terminal modules is as shown below D9153 b15 to b8 b7 to bO D9154 D9141 Station 2 Station 1 D9155 D9142 Station 4 Station 3 D9156 Number of D9143 Station 6 Station 5 Usable with A2C and A52G times of retry Number of retries D9157 execution D9158 D9171 Station 62 Station 61 D9159 D9172 Station 64 Station 63 D9160 e Retry counter uses 8 bits for one station D9161 b n 7 b n 6 b n 5 b n 4 b n 3 b n 2 b n 1 b n 0 D9162 D9163 p J D9164 Number of retries D9165 n is determined by station number of I O module or remote terminal module D9166 Odd number stations b0 to b7 n 0 D9167 Even number stations b8 to b15 n 8 D9168 D9169 D9170 D9171 D9172 APP 41 APPENDICES mms Si Number Mode setting Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Automatic online return enabled Automatic online return disabled Transmission stop at online error Line check Details Mode setting 0 Auto matic online return enabled When an I O module or a remote terminal module caused communication error the station is placed offline Communication with normal stations is continued The station recovering from a communication error automatically resumes communication Auto matic online return disabled When an I O module or a
218. l power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery Doing so may damage the battery resulting in electrolyte spillage inside the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module In order to use the programmable controller always in good condition conducting daily and periodical maintenance inspection on the following items are strongly recommended 10 1 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION mms E Si 10 1 Daily Inspection Dairy inspection items recommended are shown in Table 10 1 Check item Installation condition of the base unit Table 10 1 Dairy inspection Content of inspection Confirm if mounting screws are not loose or cover is not detached Judgement It is installed securely Action Retighten the screw Installation condition of the I O modules Connection conditions Confirm if the module mounting screw is firmly tightened Loosening of terminal screw The module mounting screws are firmly tightened No loosening Tighten the module mounting screw firmly Retighten the terminal screw Proximity of solderless terminals
219. later However use the 24VDC panel power equipment that conforms to the CE 2 Make sure to attach two ferrite cores to the power line Attach them as close to the power supply module as possible Use a ferrite core whose damping characteristic is equivalent to that of the RFC H13 produced by KITAGAWA INDUSTREIS CO LTD 9 1 5 Ferrite core Use of ferrite cores is effective in reducing the conduction noise in the band of about 10MHz and radiated noise in 30 to 100MHz band It is recommended to attach ferrite cores when the shield of the shielded cable coming out of the control panel does not work effectively or when emission of the conduction noise from the power supply line has to be suppressed We tested using ferrite cores from TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 and ZCAT2032 0930 and RFC H13 from KITAGAWA INDUSTREIS CO LTD Make sure to attach a ferrite core to a cable at the position closest to the outlet of control panel as possible If attached at an improper position the ferrite core will not work effectively e Ferrite core Type ZCAT3035 1330 ZCAT2032 0930 Contact TDK Corporation Type RFC H13 Contact KITAGAWA INDUSTREIS CO LTD 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 1 6 Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise With the exception of some models it is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line but fitting i
220. le 4 Composite system sss A system which has a combination of a network system and a computer link system The details of the system configuration number of I O points I O number assignment etc of a stand alone system are listed on the following page 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A System configuration Maximum number of extension stages a A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 A2ACPU S1 and A2ASCPU S30 system When the AnS dedicated extension base is used An example when the 64 point module is installed to When the AO N AOA extension base is used An example when the 64 point module is installed to each slot is shown Main base Slot No unit Jo A1S38B 0 1 2 3 4 5 00 100 140 to to to each slot is shown Main base unit A1S38B 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 SlotNo Extension cable 8 P to to to to to to to to 1st oxen E U OF 1F 2F 3F 4F SF 6F 7F stage UNIT ie 20 of 42 3 0 9 2nd extension stage Extension base unit A1S55B S1 UNIT PA 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 1 o om1 alimini 2 2 R 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 Boo wi to to to to to i to to to 10F 11F 12F 13F 14F 15F116F117Fi irii P jole l2 Extension base unit A1S588 S1 8 amp 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 module Power supply CPU module OR 8o 90 Ao BO co DO Eo Fo 3F 13F 17F to to to to to to to
221. ling trace m Performs chronological checking on the behavior status of devices set up when debugging or an abnormal _ behavior is detected Description e With respect to a device for which the sampling trace is set up the operating condition of the device is sampled for the number of times specified per scan or per period and the results are stored in the extension file register for the sampling trace of the CPU main module the data stored are cleared by the latch clear operation Sampling trace is performed by the STRA instruction in the sequence program Overview of setting and operation Using the peripheral devices set the device to which the status latch is performed and the extension file register where the data will be stored e Using the peripheral devices monitor the result of the sampling trace Step operation M Checks conditions of program execution and behavior during L debugging etc e Executes operations of the sequence program with one of the conditions 1 to 5 given below then stops 1 Executes by each instruction 2 Executes by each circuit block 3 Executes by the step intervals and the number of loops 4 Executes by the loop count and break points 5 Executes when the device values concur e Selects a step operation condition for the peripheral device and executes Clock Program control by clock data external display of clock data e Executes
222. lling to the top of programmable controller to improve the ventilation keep the height of the duct to 50mm 1 97inch or below In addition the distance from the top of the programmable controller should be sufficient for tightening and loosening works for the mounting screws on the top of the module The module cannot be replaced if the screws on the top of the module cannot be loosened or tightened b When installing to the bottom part of the programmable controller provide a sufficient space so that the 100 200VAC input line of the power supply module O wires of I O modules and 12 24VDC lines are not affected If any device is installed in front of the programmable controller i e installed in the back of the door position it to secure at least 100mm 3 94inch of distance to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat Also keep at least 50mm 1 97inch distance from the base unit to any device placed on right or left or the unit When installing the base unit to DIN rail in an environment with large vibration use a vibration proofing bracket A1S PLT D Mounting the vibration proofing bracket A1S PLT D enhances the resistance to vibration Depending on the environment to set up the base unit it is also recommended to fix the base unit to the control panel directly 8 9 8 LOADING 8 4 2 AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A Installation Installation location of the main base unit and the extension base unit is shown
223. mable controller 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION b c d e MELSEC A Use a power supply which generates minimal noise between wires and between the programmable controller and ground If excessive noise is generated connect an isolating transformer i gis Programmable SE controller 7 lg V0 equipment Insulation Insulation transformer transformer When a power supply transformer or isolating transformer is employed to reduce the voltage from 200VAC to 100VAC use one with a capacity greater than those indicated in the following table Power Supply Transformer Module Capacity n Stands for the number of power supply A1S61PN 110VAx n modules A1S62PN 110VAx n Separate the programmable controller s power supply line from the lines for I O equipments and power equipments as shown below When there is much noise connect an isolating transformer Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power supply be sure to connect a breaker or an external fuse that have proper blown and detection When using a single programmable controller a 10A breaker or an external fuse are recommended for wiring protection Programmable Insulation Main controller Transformer power supply power supply aa ay ON Programmable 200VAC O O O i controller Relay terminpl block i T1 i I O power
224. mber o icj i points Dynamic input A1S42X 16 32 48 64 points l module 12 24VDC dynamic input module Specified number of Dynamic output ASi 16 32 48 64 points points module 12 24VDC dynamic output module Output 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Number of occupied Current Product Name Blank cover Dummy module Model Name A1SG60 A1SG62 Description Dust proof cover for unused slot 16 point 32 point 48 point 64 point selectable module points points I O alloca tion module type 16 Empty Specified number of points Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Pulse catch module A1SP60 Short ON time pulse input module pulse with a minimum of 0 5ms 16 input points 16 ou tput points Analog timer module Interrupt module A1ST60 A1S161 A module whose timer setting value can be changed for different volumes 0 1 to 1 0s 1 to 10s 10 to 60s 60 to 600s Analog timer 8 points Interrupt module for specifying the interrupt program 16 point interrupt input 16 ou tput points 32 sp points ecial High speed counter module A D converter module D A converter module A1SD61 32 bit signed binary 50kBPS 1 channel 32 sp points ecial A1SD62 24 bit signed binary 2 channel 100kPPS DC input transistor output sink type 32 sp points ecial A1SD62D 24 bit signed binary 2 chann
225. mory MISSING END INS Checked at STOP RUN The END END FEND instruction is not given in the main program Write the END instruction at the end of the main program The END FEND instruction is not given in the sub program if the sub program is set by parameters 1 When subprogram 2 is set by a parameter there is no END FEND instruction in subprogram 2 2 When subprogram 2 is set by a parameter subprogram 2 has not been written from a peripheral device 1 When subprogram 3 is set by a parameter there is no END FEND instruction in subprogram 3 2 When subprogram 3 is set by a parameter subprogram 2 has not been written from a peripheral device 11 13 Write the END instruction at the end of the sub program 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Massage CAN T EXECUTE P Checked at execution of instruction Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Error and Cause The same device number is used at two or more steps for the pointers P and interrupt pointers 1 used as labels to be specified at the head of jump destination Corrective Action Eliminate the same pointer numbers provided at the head of jump destination Label of the pointer P specified in th
226. mpling trace execution trace is suspended Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C AOJ2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A52G Operation output at block stop OFF Coil output off ON Coil output on Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196 Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C AOJ2H AnS AnSH A1FX and A526 Fuse blow I O verify error display switching Data recovery of online sampling trace status latch I O numbers to be displayed X Y0 to 7FO X Y800 to FFO X Y1000 to 17F0 X Y1800 to 1FFO OFF Data recovery OFF ON Data recovery ON e Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage registers D9100 to D9107 and I O module verify error storage registers D9116 to D9123 according to the combination of ON OFF of the M9197 and M9198 When sampling trace status latch is executed the setting data stored in the CPU module is recovered to enable restart e Turn on M9199 to execute again There is no need to write data with the peripheral device Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC re
227. n processing is performed 1 When an instantaneous power failure shorter than allowable momentary power failure period occurred a When an instantaneous power failure occurred the operation processing is interrupted while the output status is retained b When the instantaneous power failure is reset the operation processing will be continued c When an instantaneous power failure occurred and the operation was interrupted measurement of the watchdog timer WDT continues For instance in the case that WDT is 200ms and the scan time is 190ms if an instantaneous power failure of 15ms occurs it causes the watchdog timer error Instantaneous power failure occurred Power supply restoration END o TE END 1 ane CPU operation processing Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure 2 When an instantaneous power failure longer than the allowable momentary power failure period occurred The PLC CPU performs the initial start The operation processing is the same as power on or reset operation with the reset switch 4 4 1 4 CPU MODULE A EL SECO A Self diagnostics functions Self diagnostics is a function with which a CPU module diagnoses itself for the presence of any abnormalities 1 3 In turning on the power supply to the PLC or when an abnormality occurred while the PLC is running the CPU module s self diagnostics processing prevents malfunctions of the PLC It also performs preventive
228. n OFF the input power supply then ON Does the NO YES Describe the problem to the nearest service center retail store or corporate POWER LED turn ON Complete 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 11 2 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFF The corrective action when the RUN LED turns OFF during operation is described The RUN LED turned OFF an error display when the peripheral device is connected YES Perform the correction using the error detail list 1 Part error or bad connection of PLC 2 Caused by excessive noise Reset the CPU module using the RUN STOP key switch RUN LED turns RUN LED turns For 2 Set the CPU module RUN STOP key switch to Describe the problem to the the STOP position and nearest service center retail write END to the address store or corporate office and 0 of the peripheral device obtain advice Set the RUN STOP key switch to the RUN position and operate by setting the system to the monitor mode with the peripheral device RUN LED does not turn RUN LED turns Possibility of error in the sequence program y Connect a surge suppression circuit such as a CR to the noise Check the program and correct the errors in the program source 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 11 2 4 Flo
229. n extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B is used When extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B is used 5VDC power supply is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit via extension cable Thus when one of these units is used be careful with the following a Select a 5VDC power supply module of the main base unit with sufficient b capacity to supply 5VDC current consumed by A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B Example If 5VDC current consumption on the main base unit is 3A and 5VDC current consumption on the A1S55B is 1A then the power supply module installed to the main base unit must be A1S61P 5VDC 5A Since the power to A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B is supplied via extension cable a voltage drop occurs through the cable It is necessary to select a power supply module and cable with proper length so that 4 75VDC or more is available at the receiving port For the details of voltage drop refer to Section 6 1 3 the applicable standards of extension base units 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms SECO A 5 2 Part Names Part names of the power supply modules are shown here 1 A1S61PN MELSECA1S61PN POWER MITSUBISHI INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC SVDC 5A 105VA 50 60Hz POWER LED O NC O NC SJs Sjen Or INPUT O 1 100 240VAC AI1S61PN LED for the 5VDC power indicator
230. nd A2USH board Continue Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 Stop or Continue set by parameter Error and Cause 1 When file registers R are used operation is executed outside of specified ranges of device numbers and block numbers of file registers R 2 File registers are used in the program without setting capacity of file registers Combination of the devices specified by instruction is incorrect Stored data or constant of specified device is not in the usable range Set number of data to be handled is out of the usable range 1 Station number specified by the LEDA BLRDP LEDA BLWTP LRDP LWTP instructions is not a local station 2 Head I O number specified by the LEDA BIRFRP LEDA BIRTOP RFRP RTOP instructions is not of a remote station Head I O number specified by the LEDA BIRFRP LEDA BIRTOP RFRP RTOP instructions is not of a special function module Read the error step using a peripheral device and check and correct program of the step 1 When the AD57 S1 or AD58 was executing instructions in divided processing mode other instructions were executed to either of them 2 When an AD57 S1 or AD58 was executing instructions in divided processing mode other instructions were executed in divided mode to another AD57 S1 or AD58 Read the error s
231. nected for one terminal block are limited to 2 Solderless terminals Terminal block with insulation sleeves Be sure to ground the LG and FG terminals Failure to do so may cause the programmable controller to be susceptible to noise Note that LG terminals include the potential as half as that of input voltage you might get an electric shock when you touch them 3 A1S61PN and A1S62PN do not need to be switched as the are 100 to 240VAC wide range 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 8 8 Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Connect the programmable controller system to the uninterruptible power supply UPS while paying attention to the followings e When connecting an uninterruptible power supply UPS to the programmable controller system use an online UPS or line interactive UPS with a voltage distortion rate of 5 or less When connecting a standby UPS use a Mitsubishi FREQUPS FW F series UPS hereinafter FW F series UPS Example FW F10 0 3K 0 5K Do not use any standby UPS other than the FW F series UPS 1 The FW F series UPS whose serial number starts with the letter P or later or ends with the letters HE is applicable SERIAL Q00000000 Starts with P or later SERIAL B00000000 HE t Ends with HE 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECA 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES The product sold in the European countries have been required by
232. nection cable for between the CPU main module and A7PUS A8PUE 3m 9 84 ft long AC20R4 A8PU Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A8PUE 2m 6 56ft long Data access module Used for monitoring the devices of the CPU module changing the setting values current values and displaying the operation status 5VDC 0 23A Connect to the CPU module with an AC30R4 PUS cable Modem interface module An interface module which connects the CPU module and the modem Using a telephone line the communication is performed between a remote peripheral device and the CPU module 5VDC 0 2A Connect to the CPU module with an AC30R4 PUS cable RS 422 cable AC30R4 AC300R4 ACO3WU Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A6WU 3m 30m 9 84 ft 98 43ft long Connection cable for between the AGPHP main unit and A6WU 0 3m 0 98ft long 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 4 System Configuration Overview There are four system configuration types as follows 1 Stand alone system eee A system with a main base unit only or with a main base system and an extension base unit connected with the extension cable 2 Network system eesse A system for controlling multiple PLCs and remote I O modules 3 Computer link system A system for data communication between the CPU module and the computer personal computer etc by using an A1SJ71UC24 computer link modu
233. nnot be used as an extension file register Sampling trace data and status latch data are stored to the area of the extension file register The stored block Nos are specified at GX Developer Parameter A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ZASCPU S30 AZASCPU S1 144k 4k a b c d e f 16k n A2USCPU A2ASCPU _ 64k 4k a b c d e f 16k n 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 2 When operating the EP ROM Head address for storing to RAM memory Memory A2USHCPU S1 capacity A2USCPU S1 A2USCPU A2ASCPU S30 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Remark Parameter T C set value Stored to EP ROM Stored to EP ROM Sequence program Stored to EP ROM Stored to EP ROM Main program Microcomputer program Stored to EP ROM Stored to EP ROM MELSECNET 10 network parameter Stored to EP ROM Stored to EP ROM Expanded comment 2 Ok Ok Not used area Ok Ok Block No 8 16k bytes 16k d e Block No 7 16k bytes 32k d e Number of extension file registers n can be Block No 6 16k bytes 48k d e determined by the rest of the memory capacity after storing parameters 3 T C set values main register Block No 4 16k bytes 80k d e programs MELSECNET 10 network parameters file registers Extension file Block No 5 16k bytes 64k d e Block No 3 16k bytes 96k d e 16k d e 4 Block No 2 16k bytes 112k d e 32k d e comments Block No 1 16k bytes
234. nsion cable to the left side of the main base unit Refer to this section 2 the voltage drop on the main base unit can be ignored If the extension cable is long however the voltage drop through the cable may be larger than that on the main base unit Therefore calculate the voltage drop according to 3 Use a shorter extension cable The shorter the extension cable is the smaller the resistive value and the voltage drop become Use the shortest extension cable possible 6 6 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms E Si 6 2 Part Names Part names of the base unit are shown here 1 Main base unit A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B Remove with a tool Gy gt w mm we wm wm we y such as a nipper as Description Extension cable connector A connector used to connect an extension cable by which signals can be transferred to from an extension base unit Base cover A protective cover for the extension cable connector When connecting extension cables remove the area refer to the part in the above figure with a tool such as a nipper Module connector Connectors used to install the power supply module CPU module I O modules and or special function modules To prevent dust from
235. o execute sampling trace Sampling trace is interrupted if M9047 is turned off Unusable with A1 and A1N RUN LED flicker flag Memory card battery voltage detection ON Flickers at annunciator on OFF No flicker at annunciator on OFF Low voltage is not detected ON Low voltage is detected Sets whether the RUN LED flickers or not when the AOJ2H is used e Turned ON when the drop in the battery voltage for the memory card is detected Automatically turned OFF when the voltage recovers to normal Usable with A0J2H Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Switching the number of output characters OFF Up to NUL code are output ON 16 characters are output e When M9049 is off up to NUL 00x code are output e When M9049 is on ASCII codes of 16 characters are output Unusable with An A3V A2C and A52G Operation result storage memory change contact for CHG instruction OFF Not changed ON Changed e Switched on to exchange the operation result storage memory data and the save area data Dedicated to A3 CHG instruction execution disable OFF Enable ON Disable e Switched on to disable the CHG instruction Switched on when program transfer is requested and automatically switched off when transfer is complete Usable with A3 A3N A3H A3M A3V A3A A3U A4U A73 and A3N board SEG instruction switching El DI instruction switching OFF 7SEG
236. ock No 15 16k bytes register Block No 14 16k bytes Block No 13 16k bytes Block No 12 16k bytes Expanded comments are stored to No 10 through No 13 due to short of block No 1 to 8 Block No 11 16k bytes area memory capacity Expanded comment Block No 10 16k bytes 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 2 3 Setting ranges of timer and counter 1 2 Timer setting range a b c d Default values of the timer setting ranges are as follows Timer points 256 points 100ms timer TO to T199 10ms timer T200 to T255 Retentive timer None When timer use points are set to 257 or more the default values will be as follows 100ms timer TO to T199 10ms timer T200 to T255 100ms timer T256 to T2047 The timer type can be arbitrarily set in serial numbers with TO to T255 in 8 point units and T256 to T2047 in 16 point units By setting the timer points actually to be used the timer processing time subsequent to the END instruction can be shortened Timer setting values are as follows TO to T255 constant or word device D T256 to T2047 word device D W R Allocate a storage device for the set value by setting parameters Counter setting range a b c Default values of counter setting ranges are as follows Counter points 256 points Normal counter CO to C255 Interrupt counter None When the counter use points are set to 257 points or more
237. ode 2 is not stored when AnS AnSH A1FX AOJ2H A2C A2 A2N A2A A2AS and A2U is used Unusable with A1 and A1N Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 ROM Subprogram 2 ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E2PROM Subprogram 1 E2PROM A Subprogram 2 E2PROM B Subprogram 3 E2PROM e Indicates which sequence program is run presently One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code Dedicated to Anu Scan time Scan time Scan time Minimum scan time per 10 ms Scan time per 10 ms Maximum scan time per 10 ms e If scan time is smaller than the content of D9017 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the minimum value of scan time is stored into D9017 in BIN code Scan time is stored in BIN code at each END and always rewritten If scan time is larger than the content of D9019 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into D9019 in BIN code Usable with all types of CPUs Usable with all types of CPUs Usable with all types of CPUs Constant scan Constant scan time Set by user in 10 ms increments Sets the interval between consecutive user program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms Unusable with An Scan time Scan time 1 ms unit
238. oduct Name Model Name Description pens poin s AnSumpSon Remark I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A 32 special A1SJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DP master module 3 points PROFIBUS interface module 32 special A1SJ71PB96F PROFIBUS FMS interface module points Device ne A1SJ71DN91 Device net master module 32 special interface module points A1SJ71UC24 32 special a RS 232Ctype MODBUS interface module 32 Ke MODBUS i pes interface module A1SJ71UC24 r 32 special R4 S2 RS 422 485type MODBUS interface module points 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Product Name Model Name A985GOT Description Large size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 800 x 600 dots high intensity A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT A956GOT Large size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots high intensity Large size graphic operation terminal 16 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots high intensity 16 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots wide viewing angle 8 colors STN color 640 x 480 dots 2 colors STN monochrome 640 x 480 dots Large size graphic operation terminal 2 colors EL 640 x 400 dots Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors TFT color 320 x 240 dots A956WGOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 480 x 234 dots
239. odule is installed correctly it may cause malfunctions a failure or a drop of the module If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module Check the cable for incomplete connection after connecting it Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and or outputs Insert the memory cassette and fully press it to the memory cassette connector Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage of the product Before energizing and operating the system after wiring be sure to attach the terminal cover supplied with the product Failure to do so may cause an electric shock CAUTION Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground connector Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions Wire the module
240. of CPUs APPENDICES mms Si Number Data memory clear flag Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF No processing ON Output clear Details e Clears the data memory including the latch range other than special relays and special registers in remote run mode from computer etc when M9016 is on Applicable CPU Usable with all types of CPUs Data memory clear flag OFF No processing ON Output clear Clears the unlatched data memory other than special relays and special registers in remote run mode from computer etc when M9017 is on Usable with all types of CPUs Data link monitor switching OFF F link ON R link Specifies the lines to be monitored for link monitoring Dedicated to A3V User timing clock No 0 User timing clock No 1 User timing clock No 2 User timing clock No 3 User timing clock No 4 Relay that repeats on off at intervals of predetermined scan When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock starts with off Set the intervals of on off by DUTY instruction 7 H puty m n2 M9020 Usable with all types of CPUs Clock data set request OFF No processing ON Set requested Writes clock data from D9025 D9028 to the clock element after the END instruction is executed during the scan in which M9025 has changed from off to on Unusable with An A3H A3M A3V A2
241. of the CPU module write the backed up memory contents to the CPU module before saving 2 Ifa battery exceeded its guaranteed life is stored and reoperated If a battery exceeded its guaranteed life is stored and reoperated the contents of built in RAM and device data may be undefined For this reason make sure to clear the built in RAM memory PLC memory all clear in the CPU module by peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN STOP key switch before start the operation again After the built in RAM clear and latch clear of the CPU module write the backed up memory contents to the CPU module before saving Make sure to back up each memory contents before storing the programmable controller Refer to the following manuals for details of built in RAM clear PLC memory all clear by periph eral devices GX Developer Operating Manual AGGPP A6PHP Operating Manual SW OIVD GPPA Operating Manual Refer to Section 4 5 for latch clear operation by RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module Memo 17 1 OVERVIEW mms ELS EC A 1 OVERVIEW This User s Manual describes the performance functions and handling methods of the A2USHCPU S1 general purpose PLC abbreviated as A2 USHCPU S1 hereafter A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 general purpose PLC abbreviated as A2USCPU S1 and A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 general purpose PLC abbreviated as A2ASCPU S1 S30 as well as the specification
242. of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC App 71 INDEX A Accumulator A acii 4 2 4 5 Allowable period of momentary power failure See eres desta EE E E S E 4 3 4 6 Annunciator F ccccceseeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeees 4 2 4 5 B Base Unit Installation and Removal of the Base Units Stadt ahs E AEN IE L EEN EEEN AE T 8 11 Installing the Base Units eee 8 9 Base unit External Dimensions of Base Unit App 60 Parts NAMES Aisoni iiad 6 7 Battery Battery installation 7 7 Battery Replacement ceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 4 replaement procedure eesteeeeeeees 10 7 Service life 2 2 2 2 eee ceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 4 Standard replacement timing 8 10 5 C Calculation of Heat Amounrt 0 8 7 Category Wie riiinstiicn vetlel 9 13 Circuit Fail Safe Circuit icciccccciccccisssaciceessvaccccaevsas 8 4 8 5 System design circuit example 2 008 8 3 Clock FUNCTION 2 0 2 cece cc cee cesses eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 4 3 4 6 Constant SCAN cecccccccceesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeanes 4 1 4 4 Control method cccccesseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeanes 4 1 4 4 Counter C cenana 4 2 4 5 CPU module External Dimensions
243. ogram it is usable to divide the step relay S and internal relay M into a category of such as a function and usage in using 4 CPU MODULE mms ELS EC A 4 2 Parameter Setting Ranges Parameter contents in the CPU modules and parameter setting ranges are explained below 4 2 1 List of parameter setting range Parameters are used for allocating the user memory area inside the CPU module setting various functions and device ranges A parameter is usually stored in the first 3k bytes of the user memory area Among the parameters the network parameter for MELSECNET 10 is allocated and stored after the main sequence program area Refer to Section 4 2 2 for details Even though a default value can be used parameter value can be changed to a value suitable for a particular application within a setting range by the peripheral devices Main sequence program capacity Default value 6k steps List of parameter setting range Setting range A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 A2USCPU A2ASCPU 1 to 30k steps 1k steps in 2k byte units 1 to 14k steps 1k steps in 2k byte units File register capacity 0 to 8k points 1k points in 2k byte units Extension file register capacity Comment capacity Expanded comment capacity 1 block 16k bytes Block setting for from No 1 to No 8 from No 10 to the end of unused area in the memory Automatically setup in the unused area in the memory based on t
244. ogram execution e RESET Resets the hardware Performs the reset and initialization of the operation at the operation error occurrence RUN STOP key switch L CLR Clears the data in the latch area to OFF or 0 set by parameters LATCH CLEAR With LATCH CLEAR data in area other than the latch area is also cleared For the operation method of the latch clear refer to Section 4 5 3 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A Description RUN STOP key switch is in the RUN position and the sequence program operation is being executed In case of an error which continues the operation of sequence program occurs refer to Section 11 3 the LED remains ON The RUN LED turns off in the following cases RUN LED The RUN STOP switch is set to STOP e Remote STOP is being performed e Flickering Remote PAUSE is being performed The RUN LED flickers in the following cases e An error which causes operation of the sequence program to stop has been detected by self diagnostics During latch clear operation An error has been detected by self diagnostics When an error which has been set to LED OFF in the priority order setting of the LED indication is detected the LED remains OFF ERROR LED e OFF When failure of the system or target device is detected by normal or instruction e Flickering Annunciator F is turned on in the sequence program e Connector to write read monitor
245. on of the CPU module s internal system in ASCII codes Example Stores 414 for version A Note The software version of the internal system may be different from the version marked on the housing 5 This function is available with the CPU of the following S W versions or later CPU Type Name Software Version A2ACPU P21 R21 A2ACPU S1 P21 R21 S W version W Manufactured in July 1998 S W version X ASAGPU P21 R21 Manufactured in July 1998 A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU S W version H Manufactured in July 1998 A1SJHCPU A1SHCPU A2SHCPU S W version H Manufactured in May 1998 S W version Y PAUSEP KS Manufactured in July 1998 S W version E AZUSHCPUSI Manufactured in July 1998 Stores error code when M9061 is turned on communication with I O modules or remote terminal modules fails Total number of stations of I O modules or remote terminal modules or number of retries is not normal Initial program contains an error Cable breakage or power supply of I O modules or remote terminal modules is turned off When the Transmission stop at online error mode is selected a faulty station occurs Transmission underrun of the MINI link occurs A watchdog timer error occurs on the master module in the MINI link network Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manu
246. onsumption by power supply module The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is about 70 and 30 is consumed as heat generated thus 3 7 of the output power is the power consumption Therefore the calculation formula is Wpw gt I5vx5 l15vx 15 l24vx 24 W Isv Current consumption of 5VDC logic circuit of each module l15v Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of special function module l24v Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal consumption of the output module Current consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON Not applicable to a system where 24VDC is supplied externally and a power supply module which does not have a 24VDC output is used 2 Total power consumption of each module at 5VDC logic part Power of the 5VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the power consumption of each module Wsv l5vx 5 W 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms SECO A 3 4 Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON Average power of the 24VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the total power consumption of each module Waav l2avx 24 W Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON Wout loutx Vdrop x Output points x Simultaneous ON ratio W lout Output current current actually
247. operation of the clock with the built in CPU module Clock data year month day hour minute second day of the week When the clock data read request M9028 is ON the clock data are read out and stored in D9025 to D9028 by the clock element after the END processing of the sequence operation e Executes operation of the clock with the built in CPU main module Sets data for D9025 to D9028 by a peripheral device turns M9025 ON then write to the clock element e Writes to the clock element by the sequence program Dedicated instructions can be used Priority order of LED indication Changing priority order of display canceling display For ERROR LED indication except for operation stop changing order of indication canceling display are executed e Writes data as to whether change order cancel indication to D9038 or D9039 by the sequence program Self diagnostics function An abnormal behavior of the CPU module L Preventive maintenance When an error that matches one of the self diagnosis items is generated at the CPU module power on or during RUN it prevents malfunctions by stopping the CPU module operation and indicating the error Stores the error codes corresponding to the self diagnostics item There are some self diagnostics items with which the operation can be continued or stopped by the setting of peripheral device parameters e Reads out the error codes wi
248. or contents of special register D9005 using a peripheral device If the contents are other than 0 power supply voltage may not be stable Check power supply and reduce variation in voltage END NOT EXECUTE Checked at execution of the END instruction MAIN CPU DOWN UNIT VERIFY ERR Checked continuously Stop or Continue set by parameter Whole program of specified program capacity was executed without executing the END instructions 1 When the END instruction was to be executed the instruction was read as other instruction code due to noise 2 The END instruction changed to other instruction code due to unknown cause The main CPU is malfunctioning or faulty Current I O module information is different from that recognized when the power was turned on 1 The I O module including special function modules connection became loose or the module was disconnected during operation or wrong module was connected 11 16 1 Reset and run the CPU again If the same error recurs Since this is CPU hardware error consult Mitsubishi representative Since this is CPU hardware error consult Mitsubishi representative Read detailed error code using a peripheral device and check or replace the module which corresponds to the data I O head number Or monitor special registers D9116 to D9123 using a peripheral device and check or replace the modules if corresponding da
249. or detection status e Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded MINI S3 link module is stored b15 to b8 b7 to a 7 e s 3 IE 5 4 f Data communication Bits which correspond between the PLC CPU to the signals of MINI and MINI S3 link S3 link module module is disabled shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on Hardware error X0 X20 MINI S3 link error detection X6 X26 MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 Usable with AnA A2AS AnA board and Anu AC DOWN counter AC DOWN count e 1 is added each time input voltage becomes 85 or less of rating while the CPU unit is performing operation and the value is stored in BIN code Usable with all types of CPUs Battery low Indicates the CPU module of which battery voltage is low e Bits which correspond to CPU of which battery is low are turned on in D9006 as shown below B15 B3 B2 Bi _ BO a 0 Normal CPU B 1 Battery low CPUC Dedicated to A3V Shelf diagnostic error Self diagnostic error number e When error is found as a result of self diagnosis error number is stored in BIN code Usable with all types of CPUs Annunciator detection F number at which external failure has occurred When one of FO to 255 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numb
250. ork parameters have not been set 1 Read the error step using a peripheral device and check and correct contents of the dedicated instruction for special function modules of the step 2 Replace with a CC Link module having function version B and above 3 Set the parameters LINK PARA ERROR Continue When using MELSECNET II 1 When the link range at a data link CPU which is also a master station station number 00 is set by parameter setting at a peripheral device for some reason the data written to the link parameter area differs from the link parameter data read by the CPU Alternatively no link parameters have been written 2 The total number of slave stations is set at 0 3 The head I O number of the network parameters is incorrect 1 Write the parameters again and check 2 Check the station number settings 3 Check the head I O number of the network parameters 4 Persistent error occurrence may indicate a hardware fault Consult your nearest Mitsubishi representative explaining the nature of the problem When using MELSECNET 10 1 The contents of the network refresh parameters written from a peripheral device differ from the actual system at the base unit 2 The network refresh parameters have not been written 3 The head I O number of the network parameters is incorrect Write the network refresh parameters again and check When us
251. ory cassette and fully press it to the memory cassette connector Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause a malfunctions How to install and remove the memory cassette is described below 1 Installation of the memory cassette g VU Projection Ae s O ke CPU module 1 CPU module Projection s Z i AISA 30KE Projection Projection catch a Facing the model name side of the memory cassette to the operator with the model name shown on the top insert it into the applied part of CPU module until a Click is heard a tab is engaged b Check that the hooks on the top and bottom of the memory cassette are engaged with the catches of the CPU module If the memory cassette is not installed correctly the front cover of the CPU module will not be closed 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY MELSEC A 2 Removal of the memory cassette 4 Projections for hook lt LE disengagement CPU module eee CPU module LN a While pressing the top and bottom projections for hook disengagement with fingers pull the memory cassette 7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY mms Si 7 1 4 Memory protection setting of AASNMCA 30KE When the A2SNMCA 30KE is installed in the CPU module memory protection can be set up to the A2SNMCA 30KE to prevent the E7PROM memory from bein
252. ose PLC model for system FD start up is A3H All instructions can be used Program capacity A maximum of 30k steps can be used for the main program Number of I O device points X Y X Y0 to X Y3FF can be used X Y400 to X Y1FFF cannot be used X Y0 to X Y7FF can be used X Y800 to X Y1FFF cannot be used M L S relay M L S0 to M L S8191 can be used M L SO to M L S2047 can be used M L S2048 to M L S8191 cannot be used Link relay B BO to BFFF can be used B1000 to B1FFF cannot be used BO to B3FF can be used B400 to B1FFF cannot be used Timer T TO to T2047 can be used TO to T255 can be used T256 to T2047 cannot be used Counter C CO to C1023 can be used CO to C255 can be used C256 to C1023 cannot be used Data register D Link register W Annunciator F DO to D6143 can be used D6144 to D8191 cannot be used WO to WFFF can be used W1000 to W1FFF cannot be used FO to F2047 can be used DO to D1023 can be used D1024 to D8191 cannot be used WO to W3FF can be used W400 to W1FFF cannot be used FO to F255 can be used F256 to F2047 cannot be used Index register V Z V V1 to V6 Z Z1 to Z6 can be used Expanded comment Max 3968 points Latch power failure compensation range The device range shown above can be latched V and Z can be used V1 to V6 Z1 to Z6 cannot be used Unusable Used
253. ose data is different from the entered data when the power is turned on is detected the head I O number of the detected module is stored in hexadecimal When the situation is detected in Unusable with multiple modules the lowest number among the A0J2H module will be stored Storing method is the same as Only remote that of D9000 To monitor the number by peripheral I O station devices perform monitor operation given in information hexadecimal is valid for 1 0 module I O module verify Cleared when all contents of D9116 to D9123 are A2C verify error error unit number reset to 0 I O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote O terminals If an I O module of which data is different from data entered is detected when the power in turned on the I O number corresponding to the setting switch No or base unit No is stored Storing method is the same as that of D9001 In case of remote I O station module I O number 10H 1 is stored Dedicated to A0J2H APP 27 APPENDICES mms Si Number SUM instruction detection bits Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description The number of bits detected by SUM instruction detection Details e The number of bits detected by execution of the SUM instruction are stored in BIN code and updated every execution thereafter Applicable CPU Dedicated to A0J2H MINI link master module error Err
254. overcurrent proctection device shuts off the 5VDC and or 24VDC circuit s and stops the system if the current exceeding the specified value flows in the circuit s As this results in voltage drop the power supply module LED turns OFF or is dimly ON After that eliminate the causes of overcurrent e g insufficient current capacity and short circuit and then start the system When the current value has reached the normal value the initial start up of the system will be performed 2 Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protection shuts off the 5VDC circuit and stops the system if the overvoltage of 5 5 to 6 5V is applied to the circuit This results in the power supply module LED turning OFF When restarting the system power OFF and ON the input power supply and the initial start up of the system will be performed If the system is not booted and the LED remains off this means that the power supply module has to be replaced 3 Allowable momentary power failure period The programmable controller CPU allowable momentary power failure period varies with the power supply module used In case of the A1S63P power supply module the allowable momentary power failure period is defined as the time from when the primary side of the stabilized power supply for supplying 24VDC to the A1S63P is turned OFF until when the voltage secondary side has dropped from 24VDC to the specified voltage 15 6VDC or less 4 Inrush current If the pow
255. ower supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Number of occupied Current points points Consumption I O allocation module type 5VDC A 24VDC A Product Name Model Name Description Remark A1SX10 16 point 100 to 120VAC input modu 16 input points A1SX10EU 16 point 100 to 120VAC input modu 16 input points A1SX20 16 point 200 to 240VAC input modu 16 input points A1SX20EU 16 point 200 to 240VAC input modu 16 input points A1SX30 16 point 12 24VDC 12 24VAC input module 16 input points A1SX40 16 point 12 24VDC input module 16 input points A1SX40 S1 16 point 24VDC input module 16 input points A1SX40 S2 16 point 24VDC input module 16 input points A1SX41 32 point 12 24VDC input module 32 input points A1SX41 S1 32 point 24VDC input module 32 input points Input module A1SX41 S2 32 point 24VDC input module 32 input points A1SX42 64 point 12 24VDC input module 64 input points A1SX42 S1 64 point 24VDC input module 64 input points A1SX42 S2 64 point 24VDC input module 64 input points A1SX71 32 point 5 12 24VDC input modu 32 input points A1SX80 16 point 12 24VDC sink source input module 16 input points A1SX80 S1 16 point 24VDC sink source input module 16 input points A1SX80 S2 16 point 24VDC sink source input module 16 input points A1SX81 32 point 12 24VDC sink source input module 16 input points
256. ower to the PC side is shut off when the external power supply is connected to the CPU board It stays on even after the status becomes normal Dedicated to A2USH board Operation error detail flag OFF No error ON Error Turned on when an operation error detail factor is stored at D9091 and remains ON after normal state is restored Usable with AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode Microcomputer subroutine call error flag External power supply problem status OFF No error ON Error OFF Normal ON Power off Turned on when an error occurred at execution of the microcomputer program package and remains ON after normal state is restored Turns on when the external power being supplied to the CPU board is shut off It stays on even after the status becomes normal Unusable with AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode Dedicated to A2USH board Duplex power supply overheat error OFF Normal ON Overheat Turned on when overheat of a duplex power supply module is detected Dedicated to A3V Duplex power supply error OFF Normal ON Failure or AC power supply down e Turned on when a duplex power supply module caused failure or the AC power supply is cut down APP 22 Dedicated to A3V APPENDICES mms Si Number I O change flag Table App2 1 Special Relay List Continue Description OFF Changed ON Not changed Details Afte
257. p 0 to Until the execution of END FEND instruction END processing e Self diagnosis Updating current value of the timer and counter and setting the contacts ON OFF Communication with computer link module e Link refresh processing Sampling trace processing MELSECNET MINI S3 automatic refresh processing Figure 4 1 CPU module operation processing 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A When executing the FROM TO instruction for the special function module frequently in short scan time it may cause the target special function module operation error When executing FROM TO instruction to the special function module set the processing time and converter time by using such as a timer and a constant scan function of the special function module 4 4 1 2 CPU MODULE A EL SECO A Operation processing of RUN STOP PAUSE and STEP RUN The programmable controller CPU has four kinds of operation status RUN status STOP status PAUSE status and step operation STEP RUN status Operation processing of programmable controller CPU in each operation status is explained 1 2 RUN status operation processing a The repetition of sequence program operation in the order from step 0 END FEND instruction step 0 is called the RUN status b When entering the RUN status the output status escaped by STOP is output depending on the output mode setting of parameter upon STOP RUN c Processing time f
258. panded Sold separately AnACPU AnUCPU Programming Manual AD57 Instructions Describes dedicated instructions to control the AD57 S1 AD58 controller module Sold separately AnACPU AnUCPU QCPU A A mode Programming Manual PID Instructions Describes dedicated instructions to perform the PID control Sold separately AnS Module type I O User s Manual Describes the specification of the compact building block type I O module Sold separately Manual No Model Code IB 66249 13J740 IB 66250 13J741 IB 66251 13J742 IB 66257 13J743 IB 66258 13J744 IB 66541 13JE81 USER PRECAUTIONS Precautions when using the AnS series For anew CPU module which has never used before the contents of built in RAM and device data are undefined Make sure to clear the built in RAM memory PC memory all clear in the CPU module by peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN STOP key switches Precautions for battery 1 The operation after a battery is unmounted and the programmable controller is stored When reoperating after a battery is uncounted and the programmable controller is stored the contents of built in RAM and device data may be undefined For this reason make sure to clear the built in RAM memory PLC memory all clear in the CPU module by peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN STOP key switch before start the operation again After the built in RAM clear and latch clear
259. ply for the control target is powered ON and then the programmable controller is powered ON the DC output module may generate incorrect outputs temporarily upon the programmable controller power ON Therefore it is required to build the circuit that energizes the programmable controller by priority The external power failure or programmable controller failure may lead to the system error In order to eliminate the possibility of the system error and ensure fail safe operation build the following circuit outside the programmable controller emergency stop circuit protection circuit and interlock circuit as they could cause machine damages and accidents due to the abovementioned failures An example of system design which is based on fail safe concept is provided on the next page Create a safety circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure the whole system will operate safely even if an external power failure or a programmable controller failure occurs Otherwise incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident 1 For an emergency stop circuit protection circuit and interlock circuit that is designed for incompatible actions such as forward reverse rotation or for damage prevention such as the upper lower limit setting in positioning any of them must be created outside the programmable controller 2 When the programmable controller detects the following error conditions it stops the operation and turn off all the outpu
260. pp 12 PR PRN PRV PRNV EPR EPRN EPRV EPRNV CR1 CR2 CC1 CC2 CINMP CINHP CINPT CINO to CIN9 CINA to CINZ CINSP CINCLR INPUT GET PUT STAT APPENDICES mms Si s CC Link dedicated instructions Network parameter setting RLPA Automatic refresh parameter setting RRPA Read from the auto refresh buffer memory of the RIFR intelligent device station Write to the auto refresh buffer memory of the intelligent RITO device station Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent device RIRD station Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station RIWT Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station with handshake RISEND Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent device station RIRCV with handshake App 13 APPENDICES mms Si Appendix1 1_ Precautions for write during RUN of a dedicated instruction Contents of write during RUN In the case of LEDA In the case of LEDB i i After writing the instruction is After writing the instruction is Write normal configuration during RUN executed with the previous executed when the previous contact is contact ON turned from OFF to ON If the previous contact remains ON after writing no execution causes no LEDA LEDB was added by Detailed error code 104 is processing and detailed error code mistake reported 104 is reported when the previous con
261. pply any impact to the battery Doing so may damage the battery resulting in electrolyte spillage inside the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product treat it as an industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix 7 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS N CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations Refer to Appendix 6 for details of the relevant models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions x i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been de
262. pply heavy impact to them Do not remove the printed board of memory cassette from the case Doing so could give damage to the module Carefully prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the inside of the memory cassette If it does get inside the module remove it immediately When installing the memory cassette into the CPU module fully press it to the connector Do not place the memory cassette on a metal object where current is or can be leaked or materials like wood plastic vinyl fibers electric wires or paper where static electricity is charged Do not touch the lead of the memory This may damage the memory Do not touch the CPU connector of the memory cassette Doing so may cause poor contact IMPORTANT 1 Before installing the memory cassette to or removing it from the CPU module make sure that the power is OFF Installing or removing the memory cassette with power ON destroys its memory 2 The RAM memory in the CPU module parameters T C set values main program MELSECNET 10 network parameters is not overwritten even if the CPU module is powered ON with the E PROM memory cassette installed If the RAM memory is needed back up the data using a peripheral device before installing the memory cassette 3 Memory cassette cannot be installed to the CPU module 7 MEMORY 7 1 3 Installation N CAUTION CASSETTE AND BATTERY MELSEC A and removal of memory cassette Insert the mem
263. put the manual magnification setting pulse generator error number which 0 Normal caused manual 1 Input magnification is pulse generator out of the range from axis setting 1 to 100 error 0 Normal 1 Axis setting is out of the range from 1to8 1 is stored in the bit which corresponds to MELSEC A Dedicated to A73 Starting axis number at test mode request error Error program number Starting axis number Error program number e Stores axis number in the bit which corresponds to the axis which was running when a test mode request was given and test mode request error occurred b15 o b8 b7 to b0 For For For For For For For 0 o0 O O O O Jaxis axis axis axis axis axis 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 Not used 4 is stored when running 0 is stored when not running e Stores error servo program number 0 to 4095 when the servo program setting error flag M9079 is turned on Dedicated to A73 Dedicated to A73 Data setting error Data setting error number Stores error code which corresponds to the error setting item when the servo program setting error flag M9079 is turned on Dedicated to A73 Servo amplifier type Bit pattern of the axis connected to a general purpose servo amplifier Stores type of connected servo amplifier in the bit which corresponds to each axis number 0 MR SB MR SD MR SB K is connec
264. r into the I O module may cause breakdowns Procedures for installing and removing the dustproof cover are described below 1 Installation I O module Dust proof cover To insert the dustproof cover to the I O module insert the cover to the connector or terminal side first as shown in the figure then push the cover to the I O module side 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 2 Removal I O module Hole for removal Dust proof cover ee To remove the dustproof cover from the I O module insert the tip of a flat tip screwdriver into the removal hole as shown in the figure then move the screwdriver towards the rear of the module to separate the clip from the removal hole and remove the cover 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC A 8 7 Wiring 8 7 1 Wiring instructions Instructions for wiring the power cable and I O wire Be sure to shut off all the phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage of the product Before energizing and operating the system after wiring be sure to attach the terminal cover supplied with the product Failure to do so may cause an electric shock N WARNING Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground connector Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions Wire the module correctly
265. r the head address of the required I O module is set to D9094 switching M9094 on allows the I O module to be changed in online mode One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until I O module change is complete Applicable CPU Usable with An AnN AnA Anu Duplex operation verify error OFF Normal ON Duplex operation verify error During duplex operation of the operating CPU with a stand by CPU verification is performed by the both to each other Turned on when a verify error occurred Dedicated to A3V A3VCPUA selfcheck error OFF No error ON Error Turn on when a self check error occurred on the A3VCPU A mounted next to the A3VTU Dedicated to A3V A3VCPU B selfcheck error OFF No error ON Error Turn on when a self check error occurred on the A3VCPU B mounted next to the A3VCPU A Dedicated to A3V A3VCPU C selfcheck error OFF No error ON Error Turn on when a self check error occurred on the A3VCPU C mounted next to the ASVCPU B Dedicated to A3V A3VTU selfcheck error OFF No error ON Error Turned on when a self check error occurred on the A3VTU Dedicated to A3V SFC program registration OFF No SFC program ON SF
266. re packages other than SW3 GPPA SW3GP GPPA and SW4GP GPPA cannot be used as the software package for system start up for A6GPP A6PHP When the MELSECNET 10 network system is configured with the A2USHCPU S1 or A2ASCPU S30 use the AnU A2USH S1 A2AS S30 compatible GPP function software package which contains A3U A2USH 1 in the PLC s model name The network function cannot be set with GPP function software packages not compatible with AnU A2USH S1 or A2AS S30 no A3U A2USH S1 or A2AS S30 in the PLC s model name 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION a 2 Utility package None of the following utility packages for AGGPP A6PHP can be used SWOI AD57P SWOL UTLP FNO The packages marked with can execute the same SWO UTLP FN1 functions using the dedicated instructions SWO UTLP PID For details refer to type ANSHCPU AnACPU SWO SIMA AnUCPU QCPU A A Mode Programming Manual SWO UTLP FD1 Dedicated Instructions SWO SAPA REMARK The characters generators and canvas which are necessary for AD57 S1 are created on the peripheral device using the SWO AD57P 1 Utility packages which access the AZUSHCPU S1 or AZASCPU S30 can specify only in the device range for ASACPU or ASHCPU equivalent Refer to Section 2 2 3 Packages which access the A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU or A2ZASCPU S1 can specify only in the device range for A2ACPU or ASHCPU equivalent Refer to Section 2 2 3 Use an AnU compatible utility pa
267. rective actions are explained 11 4 1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions Example 1 Examples of faults concerning input circuits and the corrective actions are explained Table 11 2 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions Situation Input signal does not turn OFF e Leak current from input switch driven by a contactless switch etc AC input Leakage current 4 Power supply Countermeasure Connect an appropriate resistor so that voltage between the terminals of the input module is lower than the OFF voltage AC input Input module For CR constant 0 1 to 0 47 UF 47 to 120Q 1 2W is recommended Example 2 Input signal does not turn OFF Driven by a limit switch with a neon lamp AC input Power supply Same as the example 1 Or provide a totally independent display circuit separately Example 3 Input signal does not turn OFF Line capacity C of the leak current twisted pair cable due to line capacity of the wiring cable is about 100PF m T d Leakage j current A oe Power supply AC input Input module Same as the example 1 e However it does not occur when power supply is on the side of input device as shown below AC input Input module Power supply Example 4 Input signal does not turn OFF Driven by a switch with LED indication D
268. register device numbers Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description The devise number used for getting direct access to each device for extension file register Details e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at D9036 and D9037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Extension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 D9037 D9036 Device No BIN data area IIIA a e Applicable CPU Usable with AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode LED indication priority Priority 1 to 4 Priority 5 to 7 Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below b15 b12b14 b8 b7 i D9038 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 a Priority 7 i Priority 6 i Priority 5 For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Fundamentals Programming manual Usable with A2C AnS AnSH A1FX A0J2H A52G AnA A2AS AnU and QCPU A A Mode Sampling trace SFC program execution work area Step or time during sampling trace Expansion file register block number to be used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program e The value stored in D9044 is used as the condition of the sampling trace
269. remote terminal module caused communication error the station is placed offline Communication with normal stations is continued Though a faulty station returned to normal communication is not restored unless the station module is restarted When an I O module or a remote terminal module caused communication error communication with all stations is stopped Though a faulty station returned to normal communication is not restored unless the station module is restarted Trans mission stop at online error Line check Checks hardware and connecting cables of I O modules and remote terminal modules Applicable CPU Usable with A2C and A52G Setting of the number of retries Number of retries Sets the number of retries executed to I O modules and remote terminal modules which caused communication error Set for 5 times at power on Set range 0 to 32 If communication with an I O module or a remote terminal module is not restored to normal after set number of retries such module is regarded as a faulty station Usable with A2C and A52G Line error retry counter Number of retries Stores the number of retries executed at line error time out Data becomes 0 when line is restored to normal and communication with I O modules and remote terminal modules is resumed Usable with A2C and A52G Remote terminal module error number Remote terminal number Stores
270. rn circuits of the LEDA CHK LEDA CHKEND instructions are written with 257 or more steps Corrective Action Check the program of the CHK instruction and correct it referring to contents of detailed error codes CAN T EXECUTE I Checked at occurrence of interrupt The IRET instruction was given outside of the interrupt program and was executed Read the error step using a peripheral device and delete the IRET instruction There is no IRET instruction in the interrupt program Though an interrupt module is used no interrupt pointer 1 which corresponds to the module is given in the program Upon occurrence of error the problem pointer I number is stored at D9011 11 15 Check the interrupt program if the IRET instruction is given in it Write the IRET instruction if it is not given Monitor special register D9011 using a peripheral device and check if the interrupt program that corresponds to the stored data is provided or if two or more interrupt pointers 1 of the same number are given Make necessary corrections 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms Si A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Massage CASSETTE ERROR Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Error and Cause Memory cassette is not loaded Corrective Action Turn off the
271. roller which are connected to I O modules intelligent function modules and or extension cables have noise durability in the condition of grounding their shields by using the shielded cables If a shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise resistance will not meet the specified requirements 1 Earthing of shielded cables a Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the control panel as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed b Take appropriate measures so that the shield section of the shielded cable from which the outer sheath cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel on an increased contact surface A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp Shield section Clamp fitting rererere Sotategecetete KREG Paint mask Shielded cable Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective a Solderless terminal 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms S ECO 2 MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET 10 modules a b Use a double shielded coaxial cable for the MELSECNET module which uses
272. rom switching STOP RUN to the start of the sequence program operation is usually one to three seconds although it may vary depending on the system configuration STOP status operation processing a The termination of operation of the sequence program by the use of the RUN STOP key switch the remote STOP or at the execution of STOP instruction is called the STOP status Refer to Section 4 3 b When entering the STOP status it escapes the output status and sets all output points to OFF Data memories except for output Y are retained PAUSE status operation processing a The termination of operation of sequence program while retaining output and data memories is called the PAUSE status Refer to Section 4 3 Step operation STEP RUN operation processing a Step operation is an operation mode wherein operation processing of a sequence program can be paused resumed by each instruction from peripheral device s Refer to Section 4 3 b Since an operation processing is paused while retaining the output and data memories condition of the execution can be confirmed 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 5 Operation processing of PLC CPU when RUN STOP key switch is operated PLC CPU operation processing Operation Data memory Remark RUN STOP key switch operation processing of a sequence program Executes up to the END instruction then stops RUN STOP External output OS saves the output status an
273. ror occurred Details e Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores 0 when errors 80 81 and 82 occurred Stored the block starting step number when error 83 occurred Applicable CPU Usable with AnN AnA Anu A2S Error transfer Transfer condition number in which an error occurred Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stored 0 when errors 80 81 82 and 83 occurred QCPU A A Mode A2C A0J2H AnS AnSH A1FX Error sequence step Status latch execution step number Sequence step number in which an error occurred Status latch execution step number Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is executed in a SFC program Block No BIN Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits and A52G Usable with AnA A2AS AnA bpard AnU and QCPU A A Mode Software version Communication error code Software version of internal system Normal Initial data error Line error Faulty station Transmission underrun error MINI link WDT error Stores the software versi
274. rrying Hour Rate Battery Life Guaranteed Value Actual Value TYP Ambient Temperature 40 c Ambient Temperature 25 C After Turning ON M9006 or M9007 Power failure compensation time after alarm occurrence 3600 hr 0 4 years 3900 hr 4 5 years 43800 hr 5 years 5140 hr 0 6 years 43800 hr 5 years 43800 hr 5 years 7200 hr 0 8 years 43800 hr 5 years 43800 hr 5 years 168 hr 7 days 4 43800 hr 5 years 43800 hr 5 years 43800 hr 5 years 168 hr 7 days 100 The power time ratio indicates the percentage of power on time per day 24 hours 2 3 4 5 6 The power on time ratio is 50 when the total power on time is 12 hours and the total powerofftime is 12 hours The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of 20 to 70 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C The actual service value reference value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperature of 40 C and 25 C This value is intended for reference only as it varies with characteristics of the memory The guaranteed time after power off is 10 minutes when The battery connector is disconnected The battery l
275. rsion Front side of the module REMARK The special function modules which cannot be used by the A2USHCPU S1 are as follows AJ71C23 AD57 S2 modules dated before February 1987 AJ71C24 AD51 modules dated before February 1987 modules dated before March 1987 Confirm the manufactured date on the rating plate 3 Peripheral Device Among the programming units A7PUS A8PUE only A7PUS is installed as an add on system Other models A8PUE use only the hand held system with a cable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 4 Writing while running when operated by the E PROM When the A2SNMCA 30KE is installed When write while running to the E PROM is executed the program transfer in progress status is displayed on the peripheral device then the processing for the sequence program is stopped for approximately two seconds until the transfer finishes to complete the write while running Because the program processing stops for two seconds stop the CPU while writing instead of executing the write while running when it affects the operation of the controlled devices When A3A or A3H is specified as the PLC s model to startup the GPP function software package which is not AnU compatible the write while running cannot be executed to the E7PROM When write while running to the E7PROM is executed the changed circuit block and any PLF instructions included in the steps after the instructions will not
276. s and handling of the memory cassette power supply and the base unit The programming units and software packages have to be compatible with the upgraded A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU and A4UCPU abbreviated as ANUCPU hereafter When the conventional programming units and software packages are used the usable range varies depending on the model of the CPU PLC model name Refer to Section 2 2 3 Related to each module used in the CPU modules check the list of equipment in Section 2 3 Refer to Section 2 2 1 for the special function modules which have limited usable device range 1 1 1 OVERVIEW E ELS EC A Features The A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 has the following features 1 Increment of the program capacity e A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 30k steps e A2ZUSCPU S1 A2ZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 14k steps 2 Improvement of the operation speed sequence instructions e A2ZUSHCPU S1 0 09 us steps e A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 0 2 us steps 3 Bytes of built in RAM memory e A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 256k bytes A2ASCPU S30 e A2ZUSCPU A2ASCPU 64k bytes 4 Compatible with the fast and large capacity networking for MELSECNET 10 The MELSECNET 10 network system can be constructed by installing a network module A1SJ71LP21 1SJ71LP21GE 1SJ71LR21 1SJ71BR11 in order to extend the base modules and set the network parameters It is also compatible with the MELSECNET II system 5 Has more points for the I O
277. s of L AC30R4 PUS data access module the SWOIVD GPPA GX Developer Operation Manual cable 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 2 Precautions When Configuring the System The hardware and software packages which can be used for the CPU module are described 2 2 1 Hardware 1 I O module All the building block type I O modules for AON and ADA can be used by installing them to the extension base unit of AST B A6LB 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 2 Special function module a Special function modules for AON and ADA can be used by installing them in the extension base of A50 B A6 0B b Installation count of the following modules are limited of the special function modules Ad51H S3 1 AJ71C22 S1 AJ71UC24 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N T AJ71C23 S3 AD22 S AJ61BT11 Only when the intelligent mode is used GOT A900 Series Only when the bus connection is used Up to 6 modules in total can be GOT1000 Series installed Only when the bus connection is used 2 A1SJ71UC24 R2 PRF R4 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N B5T A1SD51S A1S8D21 S1 ie A1SJ61BT11 Only when the intelligent mode is used Al61 S1 Only one module can be installed AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AT21B 1 pune Up to 2 modules in total can be A1SJ71AP21 S3 1 A1SJ71AT21B in total can be AJ71LP21 G GE installed AJ71BR11 AJ71LR21 Up to 4 modules in total can be A1SJ71LP21 GE
278. se units and extension cables available for the systems and the applicable standards for use of the extension base units 6 1 1 Base unit specifications Main base unit specifications 1 Table 6 1 Main base unit specifications Item A1S32B A1S833B A1S35B A1S38B I O module installing range Power supply module installing requirement I O module installing range 2 modules can be installed 3 modules can be installed 5 modules can be installed 8 modules can be installed Extension possibility Exten dable Installation hole size External dimensions 220mm 8 66inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 6 bell shaped ho 255mm 10 03inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch es for M5 screws 325mm 12 80inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch 430mm 16 92inch x 130mm 5 12inch x 28mm 1 10inch Weight 0 52kg 0 65kg 0 75kg 0 97kg Accessory 2 5 modules can be installed Installation screws M5 x 25 4 pcs Extension base unit specifications Table 6 2 Extension base unit specifications Item A1S65B A1S65B S1 A1S68B A1S68B S1 A1S52B A1S52B S1 A1S55B A1S55B S1 A1S58B_ A1S58B S1 5 modules can be 8 modules can be installed installed Power supply module not required 8 modules can be installed Power supply module required 2 modules can be installed Installation hole size 6 bell sh
279. se malfunctions or a failure of the module N CAUTION 1 Do not drop or allow any impact to the modules case memory cassette terminal block connector or pin connector 2 Do not remove the module printed wiring board from the case Otherwise a malfunction may occur 3 Use caution to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips falling into the module during wiring If foreign matter enters the module remove it 4 Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal block screws within the tightening torque range specified shown the table below Screw position Tightening torque range Module mounting screw M4 screw 78 to 118N cm I O module M3 5 screw 59 to 88N cm Power supply module terminal screws M3 5 screw 59 to 88N cm 4 CPU MODULE mms SECO A 4 5 Part Names Parts names of the AZUSHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 and the switch setting for using the CPU modules are explained following 4 5 1 Parts names of the AAUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 6 MELSEC AzUSHcpu s1 RRO L CLR ERROR RESET A A MITSUBISHI Ude Pa QUQULULUL 123456789 o O00 000000000 O00 000000000 d of 9 Description e RUN STOP Used to start stop sequence pr
280. search time of ASUPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time of the CPU module extends by 10 Applicable CPU Usable with AnU and A2US H WDT error flag OFF No WDT error ON WDT error Turns on when WDT error is detected by the self check of the PCPU Dedicated to A73 Clock data set request OFF No processing ON Set request is made The clock data registered in D9073 to D9076 is written to the clock device after the execution of the END instruction of the scan in which the state of M9073 changes from OFF to ON Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Setting of writing to flash ROM OFF Disables writing to ROM ON Enables writing to ROM Turned on to enable writing to the flash ROM DIP switch 3 should be set to ON Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode PCPU ready complete flag OFF PCPU ready incomplete ON PCPU ready complete Set if the motor is not running when it is checked at PC ready M2000 on Turned off when M2000 is turned off Dedicated to A73 Clock data error OFF No error ON Error occurred This goes ON when a clock data D9073 to D9076 error occurs This remains OFF when there is no error Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Request for writing to flash ROM OFF ON Starts writing to ROM When turned from OFF to ON writing to the built in ROM is started Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Test mode flag OFF Other than test mode ON Test mode
281. sec or less occurred Reset when POWER switch is moved from OFF to ON position Usable with all types of CPUs Battery low OFF Normal ON Battery low Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than specified Turned off when battery voltage becomes normal Usable with all types of CPUs Battery low latch OFF Normal ON Battery low Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less than specified Remains on if battery voltage becomes normal Usable with all types of CPUs Self diagnostic error OFF No error ON Error Turned on when error is found as a result of self diagnosis Usable with all types of CPUs Annunciator detection Operation error flag Operation error flag OFF No detection ON Detected OFF No error ON Error OFF No error ON Error Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is executed Switched off when D9124 data is zeroed Turned on when operation error occurs during execution of application instruction Turned off when error is eliminated Turned on when operation error occurs during execution of application instruction Remains on if normal status is restored Usable with all types of CPUs Unusable with A3H A3M AnA A2AS A3A board AnU and QCPU A A Mode Usable with all types of CPUs Carry flag OFF Carry off ON Carry on Carry flag used in application instruction APP 15 Usable with all types
282. sed to read from Pee Compatibility CPU module the CPU module Conventional product New Product PLC A2A start up PLC A2A start up All the data are compatible New Product Conventional product PLC A2A start up PLC A2A start up Because the PLC model names are different between in Conventional product New Product writing and in reading the following conditions are PLC A2A start up PLC A2U start up identified 1 If the verification is performed after reading mismatch is identified The data can be used New Product Conventional product 2 Setvalues of the sampling trace status latch data stored PLC A2U start up PLC A2A start up in the CPU module will not be displayed 3 When the network parameters are set to the new product they will not be displayed on the conventional product Do not read the AAUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 to which the MELSECNET 10 network parameters were set by a new product from a conventional product and perform the following operation since a LINK PARA ERROR CPU module error is detected a Modifying and writing in the main sequence program area memory capacity b Writing the read parameters to another AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 in the network system App 50 APPENDICES MELSEC A Appendix4 Precautions for Utilizing the Existing Sequence Programs for AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 or AAASCPU S1 S30 This section e
283. self check error on CPU B is stored in BIN code e Cleared when D9008 of CPU B is cleared Dedicated to A3V A3VCPU C Self check error A3VTU Self check error Self check error code Self check error code e Error code of self check error on CPU C is stored in BIN code e Cleared when D9008 of CPU C is cleared e Error code of self check error on A3VTU is stored in BIN code Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC refer to the MELSAP II Programming Manual APP 37 Dedicated to A3V Dedicated to A3V APPENDICES mms Si Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Details Applicable CPU Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed 1514131211109 8 76543210 D100 ooo t 10 0 0 2 10 0 o o o o o 0 stot tJo 0 o oo 0 0 0 o o 0 0 o 0 peto7 o o o oldslo o ofofo o o bfofojo Turns on all the bits corresponding to the output Usable with all module number in units of 16 points in output points types of CPUs Bit pattern in units of occupied by the modules on modules with more than Only remote 16 points of fuse blow 16 output points I O station modules Example On a module with 64 points attached to slot information 0 b3 to bO turn on when a fuse blow
284. signed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstandin
285. stand the functions Please hand in a copy of this manual to the end user Table of Contents 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 4 tT FO Atures ss onsieur i t Laadecdebbaydanie beh aeddeace ia NN Seen 1 2 1 2 A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 Performance Specification Comparisons 1 4 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1to2 30 2 1 Overall Configuration 21 cccfecceccdeccecenece aai A N a a aA devi A A 2 1 2 2 Precautions When Configuring the System esesessseesssrrecseerreesrrnnessrrnnnadrnnnnestenannennnanestennneennanae 2 3 aea O o EN o TE 1E A E N A E AE A E E tata aa teas 2 3 2 2 2 Software PACKAGES isinir irid tae ieaiai iaa SEAN EATER ERRE RENTETAN TA AEAN AEEA 2 7 2 2 3 Precautions when using GPP function software packages and A8PUE peripheral devices which are not compatible with ANU A2AS cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeseaeseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseseeeeeeeess 2 10 2 3 System Equipments anin aai a ea dad ntaudt hadu ce dhela de eae A laitiete cg dencnsebedeuthann 2 12 2 4 System Configuration OVErView ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaaeeeeteeaees 2 28 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 2 4 CPU MODULE 4 1to4 48 4 1 Performance Specifications cc ccccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteececeneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecececiaanaeeeeeeeseeees 4 1 4 1 1 Overview of operation ProCceSSing ccececeeeeeccaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeaecaeeeeeeeeenseeesecsensaaeeeeeeeeees
286. t can further suppress noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of 10 M Hz or less Use any of the following noise filters double yx type filters or equivalent Model name Manufacturer FN343 3 01 SCHAFFNER FN660 6 06 SCHAFFNER ZHC2203 11 Rated current 3A 6A Rated voltage 250V The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below 1 Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Introduction Introduction i i Output side device side Output side device side a The noise will be induced when the input and output nites are bundis b Separate and lay the input and output wires 2 Earth the noise filter ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest wire possible approx 10cm 3 94inch 9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms SECO A 9 1 7 Power line for external power supply terminal Use a CE marked AC DC power supply for an external power supply of the modules and the power cable length needs to be less than 30m 98 43 ft 1 The power cable length for the A1SJ71E71N B5 needs to be less than 3m 9 84 ft Install noise filters to external supply power terminals of the
287. t for MR H B MR J B MR J2 B 2 axis SSCNET Independent 2 axis simultaneous linear interpolation circular interpolation For positioning control digital output for MR H B MR J B MR J2 B 1 axis SSCNET For MR H B MR J B MR J2 B 3 axis SSCNET independent 3 axis simultaneous 2 axis linear interpolation 2 axis circular interpolation 32 special points 32 special points 32 special points ID interface module A1SD351D1 ID interface module One reader writer modules can be connected 32 special points A1SD351D2 ID interface module Two reader writer modules can be connected 32 special points MELSECNETI II data link module A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AP21 S3 For the master and local stations of MELSECNETI II data link system for the optical fiber cable For the master and local stations of MELSECNET II data link for the Gl type optical fiber cable 32 special points 32 special points A1SJ71AR21 For the master and local stations of MELSECNETI II data link system for the coaxial cable 32 special points Only AnACPU equivalent device range accessible MELSECNET B data link module A1SJ71AT21B For the master and local stations of MELSECNET B data link system 32 special points A1SJ72T25B For the remote I O station of MELSECNET B data link system B NET data link module A1SJ71B62 S3 1 Models to be discontinued M
288. t ensure the adequate safety of the equipment Guidelines for installation and wiring of MELSEC AnS series programmable controller are provided in 9 2 1 to Section 9 2 7 for the purpose of compliance with the EMC Directives The guidelines are created based on the requirements of the regulations and relevant standards however they do not guarantee that the machinery constructed according to them will comply with the Directives Therefore the manufacturer of the machinery must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives if it is actually compliant with the EMC Directives 9 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC AnS series programmable controller The standard applied for MELSEC AnS series programmable controller series is EN61010 1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms control rooms or laboratories For the modules which operate with the rated voltage of 50VAC 75VDC or above we have developed new models that conform to the above standard For the modules which operate with the rated voltage under 50VAC 75VDC the conventional models can be used because they are out of the low voltage directive application range 9 2 2 Precautions when using the MELSEC AnS series programmable controller Module selection 1 Power supply module For a power supply module with rated input voltage of 100 200VAC select a model in which the internal part between the first order and second order is intensively insulated because it generates
289. ta bit is 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Massage FUSE BREAK OFF Checked continuously Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Stop or Continue set by parameter Error and Cause 1 There is an output module of which fuse is blown 2 The external power supply for output load is turned OFF or is not connected Corrective Action 1 Check the FUSE BLOWN indicator LED on the output module and replace the fuse 2 Read detailed error code using a peripheral device and replace the fuse of the output module which corresponds to the data I O head number Or monitor special registers D9100 to D9107 using a peripheral device and replace the fuse of the output module of which corresponding data bit is 1 3 Check the ON OFF status of the external power supply for output load CONTROL BUS ERR Due to the error of the control bus which connects to special function modules the FROM TO instruction cannot be executed If parameter I O assignment is being executed special function modules are not accessible at initial communication At error occurrence the head I O number upper 2 digits of 3 digits of the special function module that caused error is stored at D9011 Since it is a hardware error of special function module CPU module or base mod
290. tact is turned from OFF to ON LEDA LEDB was deleted by i LEDC SUB LEDR is handled as a normal instruction mistake If the previous contact remains ON after writing no execution causes no LEDC SUB was added by Detailed error code 104 is processing and detailed error code mistake reported 104 is reported when the previous contact is turned from OFF to ON If the previous contact remains ON after writing no execution causes no LEDC SUB was deleted by Detailed error code 104 is processing and detailed error code mistake reported 104 is reported when the previous contact is turned from OFF to ON LEDR in the back is handled as a LEDR in the back is handled as a LEDR was added by mistake normal instruction normal instruction If no LEDR exists immediately after If no LEDR exists immediately the deleted LEDR detailed error code LEDR was deleted by mistake after the deleted LEDR detailed 104 is reported error code 104 is reported When the LEDR exists all instructions found between them are not executed REMARK The detailed error code 104 means that the configuration of the program using dedicated CC Link instructions is not correct Refer to Section 11 3 2 App 14 APPENDICES mms S ECO Appendix 2 LISTS OF SPECIAL RELAYS AND SPECIAL REGISTERS Appendix 2 1 List of Special Relays Number The special relays are the internal rel
291. tandard control Achannels module PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control For heating cooling control 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse wire breakage detection function 32 special points 32 special points 0 33 0 19 When the temperature conversion function of unused channels are not used in the heating cool A1S64TCTRTBW ing control 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A Product Name Temperature gcontrol module Model Name A1S64TCRT S1 A1S64TCRTBW S1 Description Transistor output thermocouple input 4 channels modules PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control Transistor output thermocouple input 4 channels modules PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control Heater break detection function Number of occupied points points I O allocation module type 32 special points 32 special points Current Consumption 5VDC A 24VDC A Remark Computer link module Ethernet interface module A1SJ71UC24 R2 Computer link function RS 232C 1 channel 32 special points A1SJ71UC24 PRF Computer link function printer function RS 232C 1 channel 32 special points A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N T Computer link function multidrop link function RS 422 RS 485 1 channel 10 Base T 10 Base T 32 special points 32 special points 32 special points
292. te unit data association BTOW h Data control instructions Upper lower limit control LIMIT DLIMIT Dead zone control BAND DBAND Zone control ZONE DZONE i Clock instructions Clock data read DATERD Clock data write DATEWR App 8 APPENDICES mms S ECO j Extension file register instructions Extension file register block number conversion RSET Between extension file registers block transfer BMOVR Between extension file registers block exchange BXCHR ZRRD Direct read of extension file register in 1 word unit ZRRDB Direct read of extension file register in 1 byte unit Direct write of extension file register in 1 word unit ZRWR Direct write of extension file register in 1 byte unit ZRWRB k Data link instructions 1 New instructions set for exclusive use with ANUCPU Local station word device read LRDP Local station word device write LWTP Data read from remote I O station special function RFRP module Data write from remote I O station special function RTOP module 4 Word device read from connected station ZNRD 4 Word device write to connected station ZNWR 4 Network refresh instruction ZCOM I AD61 S1 high speed counter module control instructions The AD61 dedicated instructions cannot be executed with A1SD61 Preset value data setting PVWR1 PVWR2 Write setting data for large small match SVWR1 SVWR2 identification Present value read from CH1 CH2 PVRD1
293. ted or not connected General purpose servo amplifier is connected b8 b7 Type of servo amplifier set at each axis is stored with 0 or 1 APP 44 Dedicated to A73 APPENDICES mms SECO Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Number Description Details e Bit which corresponds to faulty I O module or remote terminal module is set 1 Bit which corresponds to a faulty station is set when normal communication cannot be restored after executing the number of retries set at D9174 If automatic online return is enabled bit which corresponds to a faulty station is reset 0 when the Faulty station Bit pattern of the faulty station is restored to normal Usable with detection station Data configuration A2C and A52G Address b15 bi4 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 ngtgg 2820 Stn Stas Saxon Stain Sas stor Stason Sisto Stasion Stasis 15 pii n Staion ssion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion D9198 44 47 ssion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion 64 63 D9199 1 Error 0 Normal POINTS 1 Special registers are cleared when the PC is switched off or the RESET switch is set to LATCH CLEAR or RESET Data remains unchanged when the RUN STOP key switch is set to STOP 2 The above special registers marked 1 above are latched and their data will remain unchan
294. tep using a peripheral device and provide interlock with special relay M9066 or modify program structure so that when the AD57 S1 or AD58 is executing instructions in divided processing mode other instructions may not be executed to either of them or to another AD57 S1 or AD58 in divided mode A CC Link dedicated command was issued to three or more CC Link modules 11 21 The CC Link dedicated command can be issued only to two or less CC Link modules 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A E SECO A Error Massage OPERATION ERROR Checked at execution of instruction Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Error Code D9008 Detailed Error Code D9091 CPU States Error and Cause 1 An instruction which cannot be executed by remote terminal modules connected to the MNET MINI S3 was executed to the modules 2 Though there are 32 entries of FROM or TO instructions registered with a PRC instruction in the mailbox memory area waiting for execution another PRC instruction is executed to cause an overflow in the mail box memory area waiting for execution 3 The PIDCONT instruction was executed without executing the PIDINIT instruction The Pip57 instruction was executed without executing the PIDINIT or PIDCONT instruction The program presently executed was specified by the ZCHG instruction 4 The number o
295. th the peripheral device and performs troubleshooting Refer to Section 4 1 4 4 CPU MODULE MELSEC A 4 4 Handling Precautions Precautions when handling the CPU module from unpacking to installation are described below Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the user s manual Otherwise it may cause electric shocks fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten the module screw within the specified torque When no screw is tightened even if the module is installed correctly it may cause malfunctiuons a failure or a drop of the module If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module Check the cable for incomplete connection after connecting it Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and or outputs Insert the memory cassette and fully press it to the memory cassette connector Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cau
296. the extension base to the side of the leftmost module There are two kinds of ground terminals as shown below Either ground terminal must be used grounded Be sure to ground the protective grounding for the safety reasons Protective grounding Maintains the safety of the programmable controller and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance 9 2 7 External wiring 1 2 Module power supply and external power supply For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply the 5 12 24 48VDC I O module and the special function module which requires the external power supply use the 5 12 24 48VDC circuit which is doubly insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply whose insulation is reinforced External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the programmable controller use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the programmable controller is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit Intensive insulation Intensive insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown in the following table Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous Surge withstand voltage voltage area 1 2 50 Us 150VAC or below 2500V 300VAC or below 4000V 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC A
297. the guaranteed value shown in Table 10 4 the content of the memory may be erased so replace the battery quickly Battery replacement Table 10 4 Period backed up by the capacitor Period backed up by the capacitor min Guaranteed value MIN Actual value TYP Back up the program data 5 15 Turn OFF the programmable controller power supply Open the front cover of the CPU module Pull the battery in use out of the holder Disconnect the cord from the cord holder and disconnect the lead connector from the connector Insert the new battery into the holder in the correct direction and connect the lead connector to the connector Place the cord into cord holder CPU module Close the front cover of the CPU module Turn ON the programmable PORT controller power supply Battery connector Monitor the M9006 with a peripheral OFF device and confirm the ON OFF status Battery is defective Complete 10 7 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC A After replacing a battery write the date for next battery replacement on the sticker on the back side of the front cover Write the proper date by checking the battery life Refer to Section 10 3 1 MELSEC A2UScpu s1 STOP RUNO LCLR ERROR RESET O MITSUBISHI C12 TN A2USCPU S1 WREDE
298. tinue Description Detail error number of the error which occurred in a SFC program Details e Stores the detail error number of the error occurred in a SFC program in a binary value Applicable CPU Usable with AnN AnA AnU A2US H A2C AOJ2H QCPU A A Mode AnS AnSH A1FX Changed I O module head address Changed I O module head address e Stores upper 2 digits of the head I O address of I O modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode in BIN code Example Input module X2F0 H2F Unusable with AnN A3V AnA A73 AnU Operation state of the A3VTS system and A3VCPU Dip switch information Stores operation with 4 hexadecimal digits Dip switch information e Monitors operation state of the A3VTS system and the A3VCPU B15 B12 _ s BB l BO D9095 mn DN Sp CPUA System operation state Operation state RUN STEP RUN PAUSE STAND BY STEP RUN NO RIGHT OF OPERATION e Dip switch information of CPU module is stored as follows 0 0N 1 0FF B15 to D9095 0 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO SW Dedicated to A3V Usable wtih QCPU A A mode only A3VCPU A Self check error Self check error code Error code of self check error on CPU A is stored in BIN code e Cleared when D9008 of CPU A is cleared Dedicated to A3V A3VCPU B Self check error Self check error code Error code of
299. to slot 0 b3 to bO turn on when a fuse blow is detected I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program Indicates I O module verify error Applicable CPU Usable with all types of CPUs Only remote I O station information is valid for A2C I O module verification error Annunciator detection quantity Bit pattern of verification error module Annunciator detection quantity When an I O module different from the I O module data registered during power on is detected this register indicates the bit pattern of the I O module number 5 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO b1 v9116 o o TT TT TTT I i L Indicates the module 0 is fixed for setting switch 0 Indicates the module for setting switch 1 Indicates the module for setting switch 2 Indicates the module for setting switch 3 Indicates the module for setting switch 4 or the module for extension base unit slot 0 Indicates the module for setting switch 5 or the module for extension base unit slot 1 Indicates the module for setting switch 6 or the module for extension base unit slot 2 Indicates the module for setting switch 7 or the module for extension base unit slot 3 When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AnA and AnU is turned on by SET F 1 is added to the cont
300. ts The overcurrent protection device or overvoltage protection device of the power supply module is activated The programmable controller CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error by the self diagnostics function In the case of an error of a part such as an I O control part that cannot be detected by the programmable controller CPU all the outputs may turn on In order to make all machines operate safely in such a case set up a fail safe circuit or a specific mechanism outside the programmable controller Depending on the failure of the output module s relay or transistor the output status may remain ON or OFF incorrectly For output signals that may lead to a serious accident create an external monitoring circuit if load current more than the rating or overcurrent due to a short circuit in the load has flowed in the output module for a long time it may cause a fire and smoke Provide an external safety device such as a fuse 8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION J N WARNING N caution MELSEC A Design a circuit so that the external power will be supplied after power up of the programmable controller Activating the external power supply prior to the programmable controller may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction For the operation status of each station at a communication error in data link refer to the respective data link manual The communication error may result in an accident due to in
301. ule replace and check defective module s Consult Mitsubishi representative for defective modules SP UNIT DOWN Though an access was made toa special function module at execution of the FROM TO instruction no response is received If parameter I O assignment is being executed no response is received from a special function module at initial communication At error occurrence the head I O number upper 2 digits of 3 digits of the special function module that caused error is stored at D9011 Since it is hardware error of the special function module to which an access was made consult Mitsubishi representative LINK UNIT ERROR 1 Either data link module is loaded to the master station 2 There are 2 link modules which are set to the master station station 0 1 Remove data link module from the master station 2 Reduce the number of master stations to 1 Reduce the link modules to 1 when the 3 tier system is not used I O INT ERROR Though the interrupt module is not loaded an interrupt occurred 11 17 Since it is hardware error of a module replace and check a defective module For defective modules consult Mitsubishi representative 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A Table 11 1 Error Code List for the AnUCPU A2US H CPU A2ASCPU and A2USH board Continue Detailed Error Error CPU Error Massage Code Error and Cause Corrective Action D90
302. unication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to the MINI S3 link module A2C or A52G Applicable CPU Usable with AnA AnA AnU A2AS QCPU A A Mode A2C and A52G Final station number disagreement OFF Final station number agreement ON Final station number disagreement Turned on when the final station number of the remote terminal modules and remote I O modules connected to the A2C or A52G disagrees with the total number of stations set in the initial setting Turned off when the final station number agrees with the total number of stations at STOP gt RUN Dedicated to A2C and A52G Error check OFF Checks enabled ON Checks disabled Specify whether the following errors are to be checked or not after the END instruction is executed to set END instruction processing time e Fuse blown I O unit verify error e Battery error Unusable with An A2C and A3vV BASIC program RUN flag OFF A3M BASIC stop ON A3M BASIC run Turned on when the A3M BASIC is in RUN state and turned off when it is in STOP state Dedicated to A3M BASIC program PAUSE flag OFF A3M BASIC RUN enable ON A3M BASIC disable Specifies enable disable of A3M BASIC execution when the A3MCPU is in PAUSE state OFF A3M BASIC is executed ON A3M BASIC is not executed Dedicated to A3M Power supply problem status on the PC side OFF Normal ON Power off Turns on if the p
303. uring communication error 0 to 8 module s 0 to 1FFO in 10H units MINI MINI S3 X M L B T C D W R none 16 point units for bit devices 0 to 32 times Link priority CPU priority Retain Clear M L B T C D W R none 16 point units for bit devices T C D W R 0 to 64 stations Test message OFF data retention sending data 4 CPU MODULE ems ELS EC A 4 2 2 Memory capacity setting for main program file register comment etc The CPU modules has the following user memory built in RAM as a standard e A2USHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 256k bytes e AZUSCPU A2ASCPU 0ccccceceeeerteeetteeeeeeees 64k bytes Parameters T C set value main program MELSECNET 10 network parameters expanded comment file register and comment data are stored in the user memory 1 Calculation of memory capacity Determine the data types to be stored and the memory capacity with parameters before using the user memory Calculate the memory capacity according to Table 4 1 Parameter T C set value Setting unit Table 4 1 Memory capacity Memory capacity 4k bytes fixing Sequence program Main program Microcomputer program 1k step 2k bytes Main sequence program capacity x 2k bytes Main microcomputer program k byte MELSECNET 10 1 2 network parameter Network module x 4k bytes Usable Remark The parameter and
304. urned ON in Section 11 2 5 The ERROR LED is To Flow for actions when the ERROR flickering LED is flickering in Section 11 2 6 The I O module will not To Flow for actions when the output operate correctly module s output load does not turn ON in Section 11 2 7 The program cannot be written To Flow for actions when the program cannot be written in Section 11 2 8 The CPU module is To Flow for actions when the CPU module is not started up not started up in Section 11 2 9 11 2 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A 11 2 2 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is turned OFF The corrective action when the POWER LED turns OFF when the power supply is turned ON or during operation is described The POWER LED turned OFF Is the power NO being supplied YES Supply the power NO Does the YES POWER LED turn ON Is the power supply NO Set the supplied voltage voltage within 85 to within the regulated range 264VAC YES Does the Ne POWER LED turn ON Is the power supply NO Fix the power supply module securely fixed module securely to the base i unit YES NO Does the YES POWER LED turn ON Are the overvoltage protection and overcurrent protection operating YES NO 1 Check the current capacity and reduce the amount of overcurrent 2 Tur
305. urrent flows due to the stray capacitance C between L C1 SW Example supply turns collector and emitter of hotocoupler are J 5 on the load 24V Ic current flows to the next stage of transister Tr1 gate and YO output turns on by 100 us turns on for a R1 Several tens of ohms moment Power capacity gt external power supply current x resistance value x 3 to 5 C1 Several hundreds of microfarads 50V SW External power supply 24V at On 1 Refer to consumption current of the 10ms or less external power supply for modules used in this manual 2 Select the power capacity of resistance to be 3 to 5 times lager than the actual i Approx 100 us Output YO power consumption Example R1 40 Q C1 300 uF Use the below expression to calculated a time constant C1 x R1 300 x 108x 40 12 x 10s 12ms 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms SECO A Table 11 3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions Continued Situation The load which was turned OFF is turned Example ON for a 6 moment at power off Transistor output The load 2 which was turned OFF may be turned ON due to back electromotive force at the time of power off 1 if an inductive load is used Output module ombined module Source output gt __ 3 Back electromotive force Load TB2 OFF 1 Shut off COM
306. used A Varop Voltage drop of each output module V Average power consumption of the input modules at the input part power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON Win linx Ex Input points x Simultaneous ON W lin Input current effective value in the case of AC A E Input voltage voltage for actual usage V Power consumption of the external power supply part of the special function module Ws l 15vx 15 I 15vx 15 l24vx 24 W The total of the power consumption calculated for each block as above is the power consumption of the programmable controller system as a whole W Wew Wsv Waav Wout Win Ws W Calculate the amount of heat generation and temperature rise inside the panel from the total power consumption W Simplified calculation formula to obtain temperature rise inside panel is shown next WwW Late C W Power consumption of the programmable controller system as a whole the value obtained above A Inside surface area of the panel m7 U When inside temperature of the panel is kept constant by a fan etc 6 When the air inside the panel is not circulated ceeceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeees 4 When the temperature rise inside the panel exceeds the specified range it is recommended to lower the temperature inside the panel by installing a heat exchanger to the panel If a conventional ventilation fan is used it sucks dust along with the outside air whi
307. used to write to the CPU module Conventional product PLC A3A start up New Product PLC A3A start up Product used to read from the CPU module New Product PLC A3A start up Conventional product PLC A3A start up Because the PLC model names are different between in writing and in reading the following conditions are identified 1 If the verification is performed after reading mismatch is identified The data can be used 2 Set values of the sampling trace status latch data stored in the CPU module will not be displayed 3 When the network parameters are set to the new product they will not be displayed on the conventional product Compatibility All the data are compatible Conventional product PLC A3A start up New Product PLC A3U start up New Product PLC A3U start up Conventional product PLC A3A start up App 49 Because the PLC model names are different between in writing and in reading the following conditions are identified 1 If the verification is performed after reading mismatch is identified The data can be used 2 Set values of the sampling trace status latch data stored in the CPU module will not be displayed 3 When the network parameters are set to the new product they will not be displayed on the conventional product APPENDICES ems ELS EC A d For A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 Product used to write to the Product u
308. value of the voltage is about 2 2E Leak current caused by built in noise e Connect a resistor to the both ends of the supressor load card to the load is long be aware of the risk of a leak current due to line capacity A1SY22 Example Load does not turn OFF Output module 2 Triac output When the wiring distance from the output Load Resister Leakage current 11 25 11 TROUBLESHOOTING A E SECO A Example 3 Table 11 3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions Continued Situation The load is not turned OFF Triac output The load current is lower than the minimum load current Surge suppressor A1SY22 Output module Phototriac i Control circuit Triac e When the load current is lower than the minimum load current of the output module the triac does not operate since the load current flows into a phototriac as shown below When an inductive load is connected the load may not be turned OFF since surge at the time of OFF is applied to the phototriac Countermeasure Connect a resistor to both ends of a load so that the load current is higher than the minimum load current Resistor Load Example 4 When load is CR type timer the time limit fluctuates Triac output A1SY22 Output module ad
309. ve cover for the extension cable connector Module connector Connectors used to install the power supply module I O modules and or special function modules To prevent dust from entering install the supplied connector cover or a blank cover A1SG60 to any open connector Module mounting screw hole Screw mounting hole to fix the module to the base Screw size for M4 screw Base installation hole A bell shaped hole used to install the base unit to a control panel For M5 screw Hook for DIN rail Hook for DIN rail installation A1S52B A1S55B A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S65B A1S68B A1S58B A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S58B S1 FG terminal 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms SECA 6 3 Installation and Removal of DIN Rail Each of the main and extension base units is supplied with a DIN rail hook as standard The following explains how to install the DIN rail 1 Applicable DIN rail type JIS C 2812 TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al TH35 15Fe 2 DIN rail installation screw pitch When using the TH35 7 5Fe or TH35 7 5Al type DIN rail tighten the rail installation screws by a pitch of 200mm or less to ensure the strength DIN rail DIN rail installation screw 35 mm 1 38 in P 200 mm 7 87 in or less 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms E Si 3 Installing to and removing from the DIN rail a Installing the unit to the DIN rail The base unit is installed to the DIN rail as follows 1
310. w for actions when the RUN LED is flickering The corrective action when the RUN LED is flickering when turning on the power supply starting operation or during operation is described The RUN LED is flickering Confirm the error details from the peripheral device Refer to Section 11 3 Hardware error Describe the problem to the nearest service center retail store or corporate office and obtain advice Reset the CPU module using the RUN STOP key switch Correct the error details Refer to Section 11 3 Set the RUN STOP key switch to the RUN position Does the RUN LED turn ON Complete 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 11 2 5 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ON The flow when the ERROR LED turns ON during operation is described The ERROR LED turned ON Is the M9008 ON Hardware error Check the corrective action Cause of error Software error Can it be corrected Reset the CPU module using the RUN STOP key switch Set the RUN STOP key switch to the STOP position Perform corrective action Correct the error details Set the RUN STOP key switch to the RUN position y Describe the problem to the nearest service center Does the ERROR LED turn ON retail store or corporate office
311. wo digits showing the minute and second are stored to D9075 in BCD codes as shown below B15 Iu 3 BO Example toro we gt ma 35 minutes Second H3548 Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Result of writing to built in ROM Clock data Stores the status of writing to the built in ROM Clock data day of the week Stores the status of writing to the built in ROM 0 Writing enabled F1x During RAM operation F2 Writing to built in ROM disabled F3 Failed to erase F4u Failed to write FE Checking erasing FFu During writing Two day of the week is stored to D9076 in BCD codes as shown below B15 B12 B11 v These digits are always Ly Day of the week set to 0 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode Dedicated to A2CCPUC24 PRF Status of writing to built in ROM Stores the status of writing enabled disabled to the built in ROM Stores the status of writing enabled disabled to the built in ROM Statuses of DIP switch 3 and M9073 0 SW3 is OFF M9073 is OFF ON 1 SW3 is ON M9073 is OFF 2 SW3 is ON M9073 is ON APP 35 Dedicated to QCPU A A Mode APPENDICES mms Si Number Sequence accumulation time measurement Table App2 2 Special Register List Continue Description Accumulation time setting Details e Stores the a
312. xplains the precautions for utilizing the sequence programs created for the A1SHCPU A2SHCPU to the AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 AZASCPU S1 S30 1 The following 3 instructions dedicated to the AnUCPU can be used by adding to the existing sequence program ZNWR instruction For writing word devices of MELSECNET 10 connection station ZNRD instruction For reading word devices of MELSECNET 10 connection station ZCOM instruction For MELSECNET 10 network refresh instruction 2 All of the sequence programs for the A1SHCPU and A2SHCPU can be used 3 The following instructions are inexecutable for the AZUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and AZASCPU S1 S30 Note that if the instructions are used by mistake they are handled differently among the AZUSHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 and AZASCPU S1 S30 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A2ASCPU S1 S30 LED LEDC instruction No error occurs INSTRCTCODE ERR occurs CHG instruction Error code 13 occurs Error code 10 occurs 4 When frequently executing the FROM TO instruction to special function module in short scan time the targeted module may not be processed normally When executing the FROM TO instruction match the processing time and conversion time of the special function module using timer or constant scanning App 51 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix4 1 Instructions with different specifications This section explains how to modify the sequence program when instructions with different specifi
313. xternal devices such as push buttons select switches limit switches and digital switches Used to the output control results of the program to the external devices such as solenoids magnetic switches signal lights and digital display device Output X Y0 to X Y1FFF 8192 points e Possible to use in a program after the I O points usage range per each PLC described above to up to 8192 points the external output is not allowed external output is not allowed Objective is to allocate for auto I O refresh of MELSECNET MINI S3 for remote I O of MELSECNET 10 for remote I O of MELSECNET B or for CC Link Special relay M9000 to M9255 256 points An auxiliary relay used inside a programmable controller set in advance for a special application Internal relay Latch relay Step relay M L SO to M L S8191 8192 points 8192 points as a total of M L S An auxiliary relay inside a programmable controller which cannot output directly to external devices An auxiliary relay inside a programmable controller which cannot output directly to the external devices Has the power failure compensation function Used in the same manner as the internal relay M Used as a relays to indicate the stage number of process stepping program etc Link relay Annunciator BO to B1FFF 8192 points FO to F2047 2048 points An internal relay for data link and cannot output to external devi
314. ys and special registers Although no error occurs even if the following special relays and registers in the original program remains in the newly created program they will be ignored it is recommended to delete them from the program e M9010 Turns ON when an operation error occurs and OFF when the error is removed M9053 Turns ON when executing the El instruction with the link refresh enable instruction or the program interrupt enable instruction and the DI instruction with the link refresh disable instruction or the program interrupt disable instruction App 53 APPENDICES ems ELS EC A Appendix4 3 Parameter setting The parameters set in the existing CPU module can be utilized without any modification if none of them meets the following conditions Setting items Description The microcomputer program area of the A2USHCPU S1 AZUSCPU S1 and Microcomputer program A2ASCPU S1 S30 is dedicated for the SFC capacity The PARAMETER ERROR occurs if a utility package for the microcomputer program is stored in the microcomputer program area of the existing CPU module When the AD57 module or AD57 S1 module is used in the existing system the utility package of the SW AD57P is stored in the microcomputer program area The utility package mentioned above cannot be stored in the AAUSHCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 and A2ZASCPU S1 S30 as it does not have a microcomputer Registering the model name program area
315. ys and special registers with different specifications App 53 Appendix 4 3 Parameter Setting ecccccececeeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeteeeaeeeeeeeeaaees App 54 Appendix 4 4 I O Control Method ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeeeeeeecccaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseenaaeees App 55 Appendix 4 5 Microcomputer program ccccceceeeeecneceeceeeeeeeeeeeceaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeseseeesncaeeaeeeeeees App 56 Appendix 4 6 Processing of the index register cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseseeestneeaeeeeeees App 57 Appendix 5 External Dimensions asrni ga a e a a E aae a e a e a aa EE ae App 58 Appendix 5 1 A2USHCPU S1 AZUSHCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2ASCPU A2ASCPU S1 A2ASCPU S30 MOUIES ais aeneae aiea ae aaae aani aeaaaee aaea App 58 Appendix 5 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules ccceeees App 59 Appendix 5 3 Main base Unit cececeeceeccececeeeeeeeeeeeenaeceeeeeeeeeeeecececaaaeaeceeeeeeeeesesencsenieeaeeeeees App 60 Appendix 5 3 1 A1S32B main base unit ccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeecacaeeceeeeeeeesesenesnneeeaeeeeeees App 60 Appendix 5 3 2 A1S33B main base unit cccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeceeeeeeeeseseeesenaeeaeeeeeees App 60 Appendix 5 3 3 A1S35B main base unit cccccccecccececceeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeesesenesnneeaeeeeeees App 61 Appendix 5 3 4 A1S38B main base unit cccccccecccceeeeeeeeee

User`s Manual IB(NA)-66789-J

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents